Sunteți pe pagina 1din 92

The

Awaited Imām
Mahdī (D)

Dr Muhammad Tahir-ul-Qadri

Minhaj-ul-Quran Publications
Lah ore, Pakistan

I
Copyr ight © 2003 by Minh aj- ul-Quran Intern ationa l,
L ahore, Pak istan . All r ights re serve d. No pa rt of this book
may be use d or rep ro duce d in any manner wh atsoev er
witho ut pr ior p erm ission, exc ept in ca se of brief
quotation s e m bo die d in cr itica l artic le s an d rev ie ws.

Re se arch Assistant s: Prof Iftikha r A. Sh eikh, Ja we d I qba l,


M . Faroo q Ran a

Wor d pro ce sse d By : Ba sir Ah ma d, M. Faroo q Rana

è T he entir e in come o f a ll o f Dr M uhamm a d T ahir- ul-


Qa dr i’s books, re cor de d a udio/v ideo ca ssettes & CD s
of h is lecture s/a ddre sse s, is de dicate d on his beh alf to
M inha j- ul-Qur an Intern ationa l.

P re se nte d By:
Far id-e- Millat Re sear ch In stit ute
366-M , Mo del T o wn, Lahor e, 54700, Pakistan.
www. m inh ajbook s. com

Publishe d by:
M inha j- ul-Qur an P ublicat ions
365-M , Mo del T o wn, Lahor e-54700, Pak istan.
(+92-42-5168514 , 5169111-3
Fax : +92-42-5168184
www. m inh aj. biz
E-m ail: publications@minhaj.biz

Printe d in Pak istan by M inha j- ul-Qur an Printin g Pre ss.


Co ntents

P reface 1
Se ction 1
Imām M ahdī (D) is t he true Imām and is 15
from the family of F ātimah ( !"$ %‫)ر(' ا‬
Se ction 2
The D ay of J udgment w ill not arrive before 18
the caliphate of Imām M ahdī (D)
Se ction 3
Imām M ahdī (D) and Economic J ust ice 22
Section 4
Imām M ahdī (D) and the Saints 25
Se ction 5
Imām M ahdī (D) as A llāh’s Caliph 29
Section 6
Imām M ahdī (D) and Is lamic D ominance 32
Section 7
Economic Prosperity and F air Distribution of 37
Wealt h
Section 8
Imām M ahdī (D) will be w elcomed w ith 43
Open Arms

v
vi T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Se ction 9
P rophet ‘Īs ā (D) and Imām M ahdī (D) 46
Se ction 10
O bedience of Imām M ahdī (D) w ill be 52
Compulsory
Se ction 11
Circumst ances Surrounding Imām M ahdī’s 54
A rrival
Se ction 12
Imam M ahdī (D) as t he Last Caliph 57
G loss ary 65
Bibliography 69
Index t o H adīth and Athar (A rabic) 75
Index t o H adīth and Athar (English) 79
G eneral Index 83

vi F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final


Book\02-Contents (v-vi).doc
Preface

T oday is 18 Dh ul-h ijjah ,1 th e day wh en the Prophet (A)


st aye d at Gh a dīr Kh um after h is ret urn from Ha jjat-ul-
wa dā‘ 2 to Me dina. Surro un de d by the Comp anion s (!), he
de clare d while ra isin g the han d of ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (") :

. ‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻤ‬‫ﻲ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ ﹶﻓﻌ‬‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻜﹸﻨﹾﺕﹸ ﻤ‬‫ ﻥ‬‫ﻤ‬


Wh oev e r ha s me a s his maste r ‘Alī is
h is maste r.
T his wa s the dec lar ation o f ‘ Alī’ s spirit ua l sove reignty
an d it s uncon ditiona l a cc eptance is bin din g on be liever s
till the Day of Judgem ent. It clear ly prov es that anyone
who den ie s ‘Alī’s spir itual sover eignty in fact denie s the
Prophet’ s sp ir itual sover eignty. T his most h um ble
fo llo wer of the Prophet ( A) fe lt that some peop le deny
this r ea lity partly o ut o f ignor anc e an d p artly o ut of
pr ejudice , wh ich is sp rea din g unne ce ssary ten sion an d
disun ity in the M uslim comm unity. Un der the
c irc umstan ce s I tho ught it nec e ssary to wr ite t wo
pamph let s on the issue of sover eignty an d lea der ship : one
title d a s Th e Ghad īr Dec la ration an d the othe r title d The
A wa ited Imām Mahd ī (D). T he fo rmer is de sign e d to

1. t h e t wel ft h m ont h i n t he Is l am i c cal endar, and the month of


t h e pi l gri m age t o M akkah
2. t h e l ast or farewell pi lgri m age of the Prophet M uh am m ad
(A) t he year (10AH /632A D ) before he l eft for his eternal
h om e.
1
2 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

c lar ify the stat us of ‘Alī (#) a s the op ener of the sp ir itua l
sover eignty an d the latter is de sign e d to descr ibe the
st atus of Im ām M ah dī ( #), the se al of sp ir itua l
sover eignty. T he m ain p urpo se is to r emove the do ubts
that have gathere d aro un d the issue an d to m ake the
M uslim s a war e of the rea lity. T he sp ir itual sover eignty of
‘ Alī an d M ah dī (‫ ا)'&م‬+,./12) a re p rove d by the a uthentic
had īth- book s of Ah l- us- Sunn ah wa l- Jamā ‘ah, in the form
of contin uo us tr a dition s, (that is, the re is un interr upte d
ev iden ce to en dor se th e so un dne ss o f the tr a dition s). In
the f ir st p amphlet I h ave inc lude d 51 tra dition s wh ich a re
f ull a uthentic ate d an d ref eren ce d. T he rea son for this
n um be r is that this ye ar I h ave complete d 51 ye ars of my
lif e. T herefor e, in or de r to ga in ble ssin gs I hav e h um bly
use d th is r elat ionsh ip a s wa sīlah ( interme diation ) in the
pr esence of ‘Alī ("), so th at this me a gre ef fort is
a cc epted. ( Āmīn)
In this p refa ce I want to c lar ify the thre e type s of
le ga cy ( inher itance ) han de d do wn by the Ho ly Prophet
( A):
i. T he sp irit ua l inher itanc e of ‘ un apparent
suc ce ssion’ (sp ir itual khilāfah ).
ii. T he politic al inh eritan ce of ‘extern al ca liph ate.’

.
iii. T he gen era l inher itance of ‘r eligio us ca liph ate.’
T he fir st form of inher itance wa s giv en to the

. mem ber s of the Prophet’s fam ily .


T he secon d form of inh eritan ce wa s given to the

. r ightly- guide d ca liph s.


T he thir d form of inhe ritanc e wa s giv en to other
Compan ion s an d the Succe ssor s (!).
T he ‘ unapp arent succ e ssion’ is that fo unta inhe a d of
Prophet M uh amma d’ s suc ce ssion which not on ly
saf e guar de d sp irit ua l ach ievem ents an d hidden ble ssin gs
of I slam , but also intro duce d the Umm ah to sp ir itua l
sover eignty, sa intly r ank of qu tb an d refo rmation thro ugh
wh ich the Umm ah ben efite d sp ir itually.
T he ‘externa l c aliphate’ is that fo untainh ea d of
Prophet M uhamma d’s succ e ssion wh ich le d to the
Pr ef a ce 3

pr actic al domin anc e of I slam a s we ll a s it s e sta blishment


a s a pra ctic al sy stem . T his le a d to gov ernan ce an d
st a bility of the Prophet’ s d īn. It p ave d the way for the
c reation of dif fer ent I slamic state s an d pr actically
introduce d the sha rī‘ah o f Prophet M uhamma d (A) a s a
wo rld sy stem.
T he ‘ gen era l c aliphate’ is the fo untainh ea d of Prophet
M uh amma d’ s succ e ssion wh ich promote d the I slam ic
tea chin gs an d prove d the importanc e o f r ighteo us dee ds in
the M uslim comm unity. It not on ly he lpe d in the
pr eservation of kno wle dge an d p iety amon g th e Ummah
but a lso in the spr ea d an d prop a gation of I slam ic mora lity.
T he three types of c aliphate m ay be summe d up a s:
i. Suc c e ssion of sp ir itual sov ere ignty.
ii. Ca liph ate of gov ernan ce.
iii. Ca liph ate of guidan ce.
Sh āh Wa lī Allāh (‫ )ﺭ ﲪﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬, a gre at scho lar of the
In dian Subc ontinent, h as comm ente d on th is div ision of
Prophet’ s inh er itance in the follo win g wo r ds:

, ‫ﭘﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺙ ﺁﳓﻀﺮﺕ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﻪ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪ‬


‫ﻓﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻝﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺼﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ‬, ‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺨﺎﺼﺘﻪ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻁﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻝﺤﻔﻅ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬
‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺒﻪ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻜﺎﻝﺨﻠﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ‬,‫ﺍﻹﺭﺸﺎﺩﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻭﺭﺍﺜﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺃﺨﺫﻭﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﻴﺎﺕ‬,‫ﻭ ﺴﺎﺌﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺓ‬
‫ ﻫﻡ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺒﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ‬, ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺌﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﻭﻯ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻝﺤﻘﻭﺍ ﺒﺈﺤﺴﺎﻥ ﻜﺄﻨﺱ ﻭ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻤﻥ‬
‫ ﻓﻬﺫﻩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺘﺏ ﻤﺘﻔﺭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻜﻤﺎل‬,‫ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺄﺨﺭﻴﻥ‬
. ‫ﺨﺎﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺴل ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
P eople who ha ve rec eived th e P roph et’ s
inhe ritanc e a re o f three kind s: ‘Th e first
k ind is of tho se who rece iv ed wisdom, p ie ty
4 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

and inne r enlightenment from h im. Th e se


a re the membe rs o f his family and o the r
spe cific p ersona litie s. The se cond g roup is
o f those who rec eived th e inhe ritanc e o f
e xterna l enlightenment from him in the
form of v irtuou sne ss, and gu idance . Th e se
a re his sen io r Companion s, eg the fou r
ca liph s and the ten Companion s who
re ceived the great n e ws (of parad ise from
the P rophe t Muhammad ( A)). The third
g roup is o f those who rec eived ind ividua l
b le ssing s from h im in the fo rm o f
kno wledg e and piety. Th ese a re the peop le
who we re ste eped in the v irtu e o f īh sān
( se lfle ssne ss), like Ana s and Abū Hu ray rah
(+,.52 7)+9: ;‫ )ر=< ا‬, and the peop le who came
late r.’ Th e th ree fo rms of inhe ritanc e o we
their o rig in to th e finality of
me ssenge rship .1
It may be note d that this division is ba se d on
conv enience an d sp ec ia l stat us whe rea s e ach c ate gory of
inher itance share s th e qua litie s of other inher itance s of the
Prophet (A). Ea ch c atego ry ha s, in som e sh ape or form,
a re lation sh ip with the other.
v In govern ance , Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq (" ) wa s the
imme diate dep uty of the Prophet ( A).
v In sp ir ituality an d sainthoo d ‘ Alī al- M urta dā (") wa s
h is dir ectly appointe d dep uty.
v In guidanc e a ll o f his Compan ions an d Ca liph s (!)
we re his imme diate dep utie s.
As a re sult, after the f ina lity of proph ethood, thr ee
hor izon s we re set up in or der to fa cilitate the eterna l
contin uity of the Proph et’s (A) ble ssin g:
i. T he first hor izon is for the politic al inher itanc e of
the Prophet ( A).

1. S h āh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yya h (2: 8 ).


Pr ef a ce 5

ii. T he secon d hor izon is for the spir itual inh eritan ce
of the Prophet (A) .
iii. T he th ir d horizon is for the e duc ationa l an d
pr actic al inh eritan ce of the Prophet ( A).
• T he po litica l inh er itance of the Prophet (A) wa s
kno wn a s kh ilā fah rāsh idah (the r ightly- guide d
c aliphate) .
• T he sp ir itua l inh er itance of the Prophet (A) wa s
kno wn a s wilāyah ( spir itual sover eignty) an d imāmah
( sp irit ua l lea der ship) .
• T he e ducation al an d pr actica l inh er itance of the
Prophet (A) cam e to be kno wn a s guidanc e an d
hone sty.
T herefor e, the f ir st r ec ipient of po litica l inh eritan ce
wa s Abū Bakr a s- Siddīq ( "), the f ir st r ec ipient of
spirit ua l inh er itance wa s ‘Alī a l-M urta dā ("), an d the f irst
r ecip ient s of e ducation al an d pra ctic al inher itanc e we re
the Comp anion s (!). So all of th em wer e imme diate
c aliph s (h ea ds o f the ir p artic ular c ate gorie s). T her e is no
form of contr a dict ion or r iva lry bet ween the three .
T he se con d important po int to be noted is that the tr ue
st atus of the thr ee dif fer s with re gar ds to var io us issue s,
such a s:
1. ‘ Externa l c aliphate’ is the po lit ica l off ic e of Islam .
T he ‘ un appar ent ca liphate’ is exc lusiv ely a
spirit ua l off ice .
2. T h e ‘ externa l ca liph ate’ is an e le ctive an d
con sultative p roce ss.
T he ‘ unapp arent ca liph ate’ is an inher ent an d
se lect ive act.
3. T he ‘ externa l’ c aliph is e le cted by the p eople .
T he ‘ unapp arent’ ca liph is se lecte d by Go d.
4. T he po litica l c aliph is e lecte d.
T he spir itual ca liph is sele cte d.
5. T h is is the re ason that the fir st ca liph Abū Bakr a s-
Siddīq (") wa s e le cte d on the ba sis o f ‘Um ar Fār ūq’ s
(") p roposal an d the con sensus of the majo rity of the
p ublic . But the e le ction of the fir st Imām of sp ir itua l
6 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

sover eignty — ‘ Alī al- M urta dā (") — re quir e d ne ither


any bo dy ’s propo sal nor a con sen sus.
6. Demo cracy wa s to be der ive d from the ca liph ate,
wh ich is why the Proph et ( A) did not anno unc e who
will be the c aliph after h im. Spir it ual le a der sh ip wa s
an act of a ssignm ent; there fore, the Proph et ( A)
de clare d it in the va lley of Gha dīr Kh um.
7. T h e Prophet ( A) le ft the e le ction of th e c aliph to the
will of the peop le , but the spir it ual lea der ( walī) wa s
se lecte d by himself by the will o f Allāh.
8. Exte rna l ca liph ate is e sta blishe d to pe rfect the
wo rldly sy stem.
Sp ir itual lea der ship is e sta blishe d to bea utify it
with the he aven ly ch arm an d gra ce.
9. Ca liphate m ake s men just.
Sp ir itual lea de rsh ip m ake s them p erfe ct.
10. Ca liphate is conf ine d to the floor (e arth).
Sp ir itual le a der sh ip exten ds to the T hrone (of
Allāh).
11. Ca liphate is in effe ctive witho ut off ic ia lly tak in g
off ic e.
Sp ir itual lea der ship is ef fectiv e even without
takin g off ice .
12. T h is is p ro ba bly th e re ason why c aliphate wa s
entr uste d to the Ummah, an d
Sp ir itual lea der sh ip wa s entr uste d to the fam ily of
the Prophet ( A).
T herefor e, ther e is no e scap in g (room
for th e den ia l of ) political lea dersh ip
( khilāfah ; c aliphate) nor of sp ir itua l
sover eignty (wilāyah). T he dire ct c aliphate
of Abū Bakr as- Siddīq (") wa s e sta blishe d
with the con sensus of the Comp anion s (!)
an d is cate gor ica lly proven by history. T he
direct sp ir itual sov ere ignty of ‘Alī a l-
M urta dā (") wa s anno unc e d by the Prophet
( A) himself an d is cate gor ica lly p roven
by muta wātir ( un broken cha in of)
Pr ef a ce 7

tra dition s. T he proof of the ca liph ate is the


con sensus of the Co mpanion s (!) an d the
proof of sp irit ua l sove re ignty ( wilāyah) is
the dec lar ation of the Prophet (A) . One
who denie s the ca liph ate in fa ct den ie s
h istory an d con sensus, an d on e who den ie s
the sp irit ua l sov ere ignty ( wilāyah) den ie s
the Prophet’ s dec la ration. T here fore, both
the ca liphate an d the sp ir itua l lea dersh ip
a re ine sc apa ble rea litie s. Wh at is ur gently
ne e de d is a c le ar un der stan din g of the
r eality of the t wo in stitut ions in or de r to
pr esent conform ity r ather than diff eren ce
( cla sh) bet we en the t wo .
It sho uld be un der stood that just a s the externa l
c aliphate starte d with the right ly- guide d ca liph s an d its
ble ssin gs wer e pa sse d on to the r ighteo us an d just r uler s,
sim ilar ly the unapp arent c aliphate ( sp irit ua l sover eignty)
st arte d with ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (") an d it s ble ssin gs we re
pa sse d on to the me m ber s of the Prophet’ s fam ily an d
pe rfecte d sa ints of the Umm ah. By mean s of the
de claration — ‫ﻭﻻ ﻩ‬‫ ﻤ‬‫ ﻲ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ ﹶﻓﻌ‬‫ﻭﻻﻩ‬‫ ﻜﹸﻨﹾﺕﹸ ﻤ‬‫ﻥ‬‫ ( ﻤ‬who ever ha s m e a s his
ma ster ‘Alī is h is ma ster) — an d — ‫ ﻭﻝ ﻴﻜ ﻡ ﻤ ﻥ ﺒﻌ ﺩﻱ‬‫ ‘( ﻋﻠ ﻲ‬Alī
is yo ur sp ir itual le a der after me ) — the Prophet ( A)
p ublic ly dec lar e d ‘ Alī (") a s the op ener of sp ir itua l
sover eignty.
Sh āh Walī Allāh (A/12 7)+9: ;‫ ا‬B,C‫ )ر‬in the chapter of
wilāyah say s:

‫ﻝ ﺍﹶﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﹸﻣﺖ ﻣﺮﺣﻮﻣﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺗﺢﹺ ﺍﹶ ﻭ‬.1


.‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬
In th is Ummah th e first pe rson to open
the doo r o f spiritua l sov e re ignty ( wilāy ah)
is ‘A lī a l- Murtadā (A.D‫ و‬7)+9: ;‫م ا‬F‫)آ‬.1

1. S h āh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yya h (1 : 1 03 ).


8 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ﺮ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﹶﻣﲑ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻻﺩ ﻛﺮﺍﻡ‬‫ ﻭ ﺳ‬.2


.‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺳﺮﺍﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
The sec re t of th e sp iritual sove reign ty
( wilāyah ) of the Lead e r (‘A lī 7)+9: ;‫م ا‬F‫آ‬
A.D‫ )و‬wa s pa ssed down to h is ch ild ren.1

‫ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﻛﺴﻰ ﺍﹶﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻻ ﲞﺎﻧﺪﺍﻥ‬.3


.‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻬﻰ ﺍﹶﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‬
The re fo re, the re is no t a sing le sa int in
the Ummah who is no t d ire ctly or ind ire ctly
link ed to the family o f ‘A lī (") ( to a tta in
spiritua l leade rship ).2

‫ﻝ‬‫ ﻭ ﺍﹶﺯ ﺍﹸﻣﺖ ﺁﳓﻀﺮﺕ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﹶ ﻭ‬.4


‫ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻗﺪﻡ‬,‫ﻛﺴﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﺑﺎﺏ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
,‫ﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﺍﳌﺆﻣﻨﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬
.‫ﻭ ﳍﺬﺍ ﺳﻼﺳﻞ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
The first pe rson in the P roph et’ s
Ummah who open ed the gate o f se lf-denia l
in ( the most supe rio r and po we rful catego ry
o f) spiritua l so ve re ign ty and who took the
first step on to this eleva ted spot is ‘Alī ( ‫م‬F‫آ‬
A.D ‫ )ا; و‬. Tha t is why d ifferent o rde rs
( sa lā sil) of sp irituality re turn to h im.3
5. Sh āh W alī Allāh (A/12 7)+9: ;‫ ا‬B,C‫ )ر‬write s:
“ No w who soever rec eiv e s wilāyah
( sp irit ua l sov ere ignty) from the Ho ly
Prophet M uh amma d ( A), it is e ither
r ece ive d thro ugh a re lation sh ip with ‘ Alī

1. S h āh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yya h (1 : 1 03 ).


2. S h āh W al ī Al l āh, at -T af hī māt -ul -i l āhi yya h (1 : 1 04 ).
3. S h āh W al ī Al l āh, Hama‘āt (p. 60).
Pr ef a ce 9

a l-M urtadā (") or a r elation ship with the


Chief Help er ( Gh a wth- ul-A‘ zam) Jīlan ī
(A/12 7)+9: ;‫ ا‬B,C‫ )ر‬. No one c an gain wilāyah
( sp irit ua l sov ere ignty) by bypa ssin g this
pro ce ss.”1
It sho uld be note d that the relation ship with the Chief
Help er ( Gha wth- ul-A‘zam ) is in f act a chapte r an d a r ay of
the r elation ship with ‘ Alī al- M urta dā (" ).
Sh āh I sm ā‘īl Dih la wī h a s c lar if ie d this po int:
“ ‘Alī al- M urta dā (") a lso ha s
super ior ity in a sin gle dimen sion over Abū
Bakr a s- Siddīq (") an d ‘ Umar Fār ūq (").
T his sup erior ity lie s, f ir stly, in the gr eater
n um be r of his fo llo wer s. Se con dly , all
c ate gorie s of wilāyah ( sp ir itua l
sover eignty) fro m his day till the en d of
tim e ar e only po ssible thro ugh h im. He ha s
a say in the k in gdom of the kin gs an d the
lea der ship of the le a der s an d this is not
h idden f rom those who ar e f amiliar with the
wo rld of an ge ls… Mo st sp ir itua l ch ain s a re
direct ly deriv e d from ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (").
So , on the Day o f Judgement, ‘Alī’s army
includin g follo wer s of h igh stat us an d great
r ep utation, will o utnum ber an d o utsh ine
other s to be a so urc e of won der fo r a ll the
spe ctators. ”2
‘ Spirit ua l sove re ignty’ ( wilā yah), within the Prophet
M uh amma d’ s (A) Umm ah, who se fo unta inhea d is ‘ Alī
a l-M urtadā ("), is dire ctly sh are d by Fātim ah, Ha ssan an d
Husse in (!) an d then through them it wa s pa sse d do wn to
the t we lve Imām s ( spirit ua l lea de rs) , the la st lea der be in g
Im ām Mah dī ( #). Just a s ‘ Alī a l-M urta dā ( #) is the

1. S h āh W al ī Al l āh, Hama‘āt (p. 62).


2. S h āh Is m ā‘ ī l Di hl awī , Si r āt mus t aqī m (p . 6 7).
‫‪10‬‬ ‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D‬‬

‫‪open er of spir itual sove re ignty, Imām M ah dī ( #) is the‬‬


‫‪se al o f spir itual sov ere ignty.‬‬
‫‪T he wor ds of Sh aykh M uja ddid Alf T hānī Ahma d‬‬
‫‪) approp riately h igh light the‬ر‪ B,C‬ا; ‪Sa rh an dī (A/12 7)+9:‬‬
‫‪po int:‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﺍﻫﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻘﺮﺏ ﻭﻻﻳﺖ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻻﺀ ﻭ ﳒﺒﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ‪ ,‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﳘﲔ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺟﺬﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻓﻪ‪ ,‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﳘﲔ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭ ﺣﻴﻠﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﻮﺍﻯ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻓﻴﺾ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺗﻀﻰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﱘ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﻨﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺋﻴﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺴﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﻮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﺍﻭﺳﺖ ﻛﺮﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻭﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﻓﺎﻃﻤﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﻀﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻨﲔ ﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﷲ ﺗﻌﺎﱃ ﻋﻨﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﻨﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﮔﺍﺭﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻼﺫ ﻭﻣﻠﺠﺎﺀ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪,‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺄ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﻯ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ ﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺰﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺣﻀﺮﺕ ﺍﻣﲑ ﲤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﲝﻀﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﻨﲔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻮﺽ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻠﻢ ﮔﺸﺖ‪ ,‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﳘﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺼﺐ‬
‫‪‬ﺮﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺋﻤﻪ ﺍﺛﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬
Pr ef a ce 11

‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻔﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻋﺼﺎﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﳘﭽﻨﲔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬


‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﲢﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﺾ ﻭ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﲑﺳﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻮﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﲞﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻧﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﻭ ﻣﻼﺫ ﻭ‬,‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﻭ ﳒﺒﺎﻯ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺠﺎﺀ ﳘﻪ ﺍﻳﺸﺎﻥ ﺑ ﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻏﲑ ﺍﺯ‬
.‫ﳊﻮﻕ ﲟﺮﻛﺰ ﭼﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
And the re is anothe r way clo se to
spiritua l sov ereign ty and th is is th e way o f
a ll ca tego rie s of sa ints o f all leve ls. The
pa th o f mysticism (ta sa wwuf) sp rings from
this path and it also in volv e s the sta tu s o f
se lf-d enia l. In te rmedia tion is p ro ven in this
p roc ess b ecau se ‘A lī al- Mu rtadā ( ") is the
founta inhead of from which the Sha ykh s o f
those on this path gain a ll their ble ssing s.
And th is grand office is re se rv ed for him.
On this pa th, th e fee t o f th e Ho ly P rophe t
( A) a re on ‘A lī’s head wh erea s Fā timah,
Ha ssan and Hu sse in (!) share this statu s
with him. I b elie ve that he enjo yed this
po sition ev en be fore his ph ysica l b irth, a s
he did a fte r it. Who soev e r ha s rec eived the
d ivin e ble ssing s and guidan ce on this pa th,
ha s rece iv ed it through h im, be cau se he is
c lo se st to th e last po in t on th is path and the
c entre of this spo t be long s to h im. And
when ‘A lī’s p eriod ended , the g rand office
wa s passed down to Ha ssan and Husse in
(+ ,.52 7)+9: ;‫)ر=< ا‬. Th en it wa s passed do wn
to the twe lv e Imāms in th e co rre ct o rde r
one by on e, the la st of whom will b e Imām
Mahdī (D). Who soe ve r re ce ived guidan ce
in their life and afte r the ir dea th, rec eived
it th rough th e se sa ints. The se Imāms a re
12 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

the sou rce of a ll b le ssing fo r e ven the h igh


rank ing sain ts ( such as qut ubs and n uja bā’
be cau se the y a re th e c entre of all sp iritua l
ac tivity ) and no one can survive without a
link with the h eadquarte rs.1
Sh aykh Ahma d Sarh an dī (A/12 7)+9: ;‫ ا‬B,C‫ )ر‬be lieve s that
Im ām Mah dī ( #) will sh are spir it ual sove reignty
( wilāyah ) with ‘Alī a l-M urta dā (").
T he gist of the disc ussion is that the Proph et’s
de claration at Gha dīr Kh um p rove d forev er that ‘Alī’ s
spirit ua l sov ere ignty is in fact the Prophet M uh amma d’ s
spirit ua l sove re ignty. As the door of prophethoo d wa s
c lo se d after th e Ho ly Proph et (A) , Allāh ($) ha s op ene d
ne w aven ues for the contin uation of the Proph et’s
ble ssin gs till th e Day of Judgement. Som e were blesse d by
an extern al stat us wh ilst other s by an interna l status. T he
h idden aven ue is kno wn a s sp irit ua l sove reignty an d ‘ Alī
a l-M urtadā (") wa s its f ir st Imām . T hen this cha in of
sover eignty wa s pa sse d do wn to the Prophet’ s fam ily an d
f ina lly to the t we lve Im āms. Beside s the t welv e Imām s
there ar e thousan ds of othe r pio us in div idua ls who
r each e d the stat us of sainthoo d. T hey h ave h eld high rank s
of sainthoo d ( such a s gha wth, qu tub) an d hav e enlightene d
the liv e s of million s of peop le thro ugh the intern al light of
wilāyah , takin g th em o ut of ignoran ce an d a stray . Yet all
of th em ga ine d th eir spir itual st atus f rom the sp ir itua l
sover eignty of ‘Alī a l-M urta dā ("), be it directly or
in dir ectly. No one wa s se lf- suff icient an d in depen dent
from th e wilāyah of ‘ Alī a l-M urtadā (" ) an d th is cha in
will contin ue up to the Day o f Judgement until the
app ear ance of the la st Im ām ( sp irit ua l le a der ) an d the
c entre of sp ir itua l lea de rsh ip. He will be Imām
M uh amma d M ah dī ( #), the t we lfth Im ām an d the last
c aliph. In his pe rson , the exte rnal an d the un apparent
c aliphate s wh ich r an par alle l to e ach other will come
to gether. He will be the sp ir itual a s well a s the po litica l

1. S h aykh Ahm ad S arhand ī , Makt ūbāt (9: 17 3# 12 3).


Pr ef a ce 13

inher itor, an d h e will be the la st pe rson to ho ld the office s


of kh ilā fah an d wilāyah . Anyone who denies I mām Mah dī
( #) will deny both the externa l an d unappa rent form s of
I slam.
T his will be the climax of the expo sure an d disc losure
of the Prophet M uhamm a d’ s ble ssin g. T his is due to the
f act that, he will be nam e d M uhamm a d an d he will also
r esem ble the Ho ly Prophet ( A) in mora l exce llenc e. So
the wor ld sho uld kno w that this Imām is the r ec ipient of
both the externa l an d intern al inher itanc e o f the Proph et’s
ble ssin gs. T hat is why th e Prophet ( A) said, “ Anyone
who den ie s M ah dī will be a disbeliev er. ”
At that time, he will be th e fo c us of all saints on earth,
an d, bein g the lea der o f Proph et M uh amma d’ s Umm ah,
proph et ‘Īsā ( #) will offer his pr ayer beh in d him an d in
this way , he will anno unc e h is lea der sh ip to the who le
wo rld.
So we sho uld r ea lize that ‘ Alī al-M urta dā ( #) an d
M ah dī ( #) o f the e arth an d h eaven s — the father an d the
son — ar e both Allāh’ s fr ien ds an d the Proph et’s
inher itors. It is therefor e comp ulsory on ev ery be liever to
a ckno wle dge their exc eptiona l status.
M ay Allāh ($) giv e us the a bility to ga in ble ssin gs
from the se fo unta inhe a ds of wilāyah . (Ām īn! with the
interme diation o f the L ea de r of the Proph ets ( A)).

M uhammad Ta hir- ul-Qad ri


On e of the servant s of Proph et’s ( A) Fa mily
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 15

Secti on 1
Imām Mahdī (D ) is the true Imām and is
from the family o f Fātimah ( !"$ %‫) ر(' ا‬
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻴﺏ ﻴﻘﻭل‬.1
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﺫﻜﺭ‬:‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﻘﻭل‬
. ‫ ﻫﻭ ﺤﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬,‫ ﻨﻌﻡ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Sa ‘īd ibn M usayya b r elate s that he h ear d Umm
Sa lamah ( !"$ %‫ )ر(' ا‬say: I h ear d the M essen ger of Allāh
( A) m ention Mah dī. He said: y es, M ah dī is th e T ruth
(that is, his appear anc e is tr ue an d immin ent) an d h e will
be from the fam ily o f Fātimah .”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻨﺱ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺎﻝﻙ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.2


‫ﹶﻝﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﺏ ﺴﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ ﻨﺤﻥ ﻭ‬: ‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﺃﻨﺎ ﻭﺤﻤﺯﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺠﻌﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﺤﺴﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺤﺴﻴﻥ‬: ‫ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺠﻨﺔ‬
. ‫ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Ana s ibn Mā lik ( ) na rrate s: I he ar d the M essen ger
of Allāh (A) say : we, the childr en of ‘Abd- ul-M uttalib,
will be the ch ief s of the p eople of Par a dise , that is,
my se lf, Ham zah, ‘ Alī, Ja ‘far, Ha ssan , Husse in an d
M ah dī. ”2

‫ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻝﺕ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.3


. ‫ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬

1. Related by Hākim in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8671), while Dhahabī


kept silent about it.
2. Ibn Mājah narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:455
(#4087); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (3:211 # 4940); Mizzī, Tuhfat-ul-
ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (1:86 # 195); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-
‘ummāl (12:97 # 34162).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
16 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

“ Umm Salamah ( !"$ %‫ )ر(' ا‬say s that Allāh’ s


M essen ger (A) ment ione d Mah dī ( an d h e sa id:) he will
be from the children of Fātim ah.”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺎﺌﺸﺔ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.4


‫ ﻫﻭ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻨﺘﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺘﻠﺕ ﺃﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
. ‫ﺍﻝﻭﺤﻲ‬
“ ‘Ā’ ish ah ( !"$ %‫ )ر(' ا‬re late s that the Prophet (A)
sa id: M ah dī will be f rom my children who will f ight (to
e sta blish) my sunnah a s I fo ught a ccor din g to the div ine
r evelation. ”2

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺃﺒﺎ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﺤﺒﻴﺏ‬.5


‫ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬:‫ ﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬,‫ﺒﻴﻨﻜﻡ ﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﺩﻥ‬
‫ ﻓﻘﺎل ﻝﻪ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﻴﻘﺎل ﻝﻪ‬.‫ ﻴﺩﻭﻡ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ﻫﺭﻗل‬
: ‫ ﻥ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ؟ ﻗﺎل‬‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ! ﻤ‬:‫ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﺭﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺨﻴﻼﻥ‬
,‫ﻝﺩ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻜﺄﻥ ﻭﺠﻬﻪ ﻜﻭﻜﺏ ﺩﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺨﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ‬‫ﻤﻥ ﻭ‬
, ‫ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺀﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻌﻭﺍﻴﺘﺎ ﻥ ﻜﺄﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺭﺠﺎل ﺒﻨﻲ ﺇﺴﺭﺍﺌﻴل‬,‫ﺨﺎل ﺃﺴﻭﺩ‬
.‫ ﻴﺴﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻜﻨﻭﺯ ﻭﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﻤﺩﺍﺌﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ‬,‫ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﻋﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ‬
“ Sulaymān ibn Ha bīb say s that he he ar d Abū Um āmah
( ) narr ate: T he Me ssen ge r of Allāh (A) said: ther e will
be pe ac e bet ween yo u an d Ro me fo ur time s an d the fo urth
tim e the lea de r of the Roman s will be a pe rson belon gin g
to the ch ildr en of Her ac lius. T his ‘p ea ce’ will la st seven
contin uo us y ear s. A man from ‘ Abd a l-Qays, M usta wr id

1. Hākim related it in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8672); and Suyūtī in al-


Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:74).
2. Ibn Hammād narrat ed it in al-Fitan (1:371#1092); and Suyūtī
copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:74).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 17

ibn Khay lān, a ske d the Me ssen ger o f Allāh (A) : who
will be the Imām of the M uslim s at that time ? He ( A)
r eplie d: that pe rson will be from (my) ch ildr en an d he will
be forty ye ar s o ld. His f ac e will be br ight like a star an d
there will be a black bea uty spot on his r ight che ek, an d
he will be dre sse d in t wo cotton go wn s an d it will seem a s
tho ugh h e is exa ctly like one of the Ch ildren of I sra el. He
will r ule for t en ye ar s, discov er tre asure s fro m ben eath the
e arth an d con quer the c itie s r ule d by the po lytheists. ”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.6


. ‫ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ‬:‫ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn M as‘ ūd ( 3!" $ % ‫ )ر(' ا‬h a s r elated it
from the Proph et (A) : he sa id: T he n ame of Mah dī will
be M uhamm a d.”2

1. Tabarānī narrated it in al-Mu‘jam-ul -kabīr (8:101#7495), Musnad-


ush-shāmiyyīn (2:410#1600); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id
(7:318,319).
2. Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatawā (2:73).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
18 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Secti on 2
The Day o f J udgment will not arrive
be fore the caliphate o f Imām M ahdī (D)
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.7
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺫﻫﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺏ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
“ Related by ‘Abdullāh ibn Ma s‘ ūd ( 3!"$ %‫ )ر(' ا‬that
the Me ssen ger o f Allāh’ (A) sa id: the wor ld will not
se ize to exist until someon e from my fam ily be come s the
k in g of Ara bia whose nam e will be the same a s my n ame
( ie M uhamm a d).”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.8


.‫ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻭﺍﻁ ﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻭﺃﺨﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺼﺎﻝﺢ‬:‫ﻗﺎل ﻋﺎﺼﻡ‬
‫ل ﺍﷲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ‬‫ ﻝﻁﻭ‬, ‫ ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬
. ‫ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻠﻲ‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn M as‘ ūd ( 3!" $ % ‫ )ر(' ا‬narr ate s that the
Prophet (A) said: one of my ch ildren will be the caliph
an d his n ame will be the same as min e.

1. Tirmidhī narrated it in al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters o f fitan


(turmoils) 4:85 (#2230); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, b.o f Mahdī, 4:87
(#4282); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (1:376, 377, 430, 448);
Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (13:284 # 5954; 15:237 # 6824); Ibn Abī
Shaybah, al-Musannaf (15:198); Bazzār, al-Musnad (5:204
#1803); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:488 # 8364); Tabarānī, al-
Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:131, 133-137 # 10208, 10213-10230), al-
Mu‘jam-us-saghīr (2:290 # 1181); Abū Nu‘aym, Hilyat-ul-awliyā’
wa tabaqāt-ul-asfiyā’ (5:75); Khatīb Baghdādī, Tārīkh Baghdad
(4:388); and Mizzī in Tuhfat-ul-ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf (7:23 #
9208).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 19

“ ‘Āsim sa id: Abū Sā lih r elate d to us: Na rrate d by Abū


Hurayr ah ( ) : even if only one day rem ain s befor e the
en d of the world, Allāh will len gthen the day to the extent
that that per son ( ie Mah dī) be come s the ca liph .”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻝﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.9


. ‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
“ Umm Sa lam ah ( !"$ %‫ )ر(' ا‬say s: I hea r d the
M essen ger of Allāh (A) say: M ah dī will be from my
f amily an d he will be f rom the ch ildren of Fātimāh .”2

‫ ﻜﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻨﻀﺭﺓ‬.10


‫ ﻴﻭﺸﻙ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻴﺠﺒﻰ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﻡ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻭﻻ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﺃ ﺴﻜﺕ ﻫﻨﻴﺔ‬. ‫ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻡ‬: ‫ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﻙ؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ‬.‫ﻤﺩﻯ‬
‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
.‫ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ‬
‫ ﺃﺘﺭﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ ﻨﻀﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﺀ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
. ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺍﻝﻌﺯﻴﺯ؟ ﻓﻘﺎﻻ‬
“ Abū Na dr ah narr ates that we we re with Jā bir ibn
‘ Abdullāh ( 3!" $ % ‫ )ر(' ا‬when h e sa id: T hat time is ne ar
wh en ne ither dinar s nor gra in will be bro ught to the
nativ e s of Syr ia. We a ske d: who will impose this
r estr iction? Jā bir ( ) sa id: T he Rom ans. T hen he kept

1. Tirmidhī graded it Hassan (fair) sahīh (sound) in al-Jāmi‘-us-


sahīh, (chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:85 (#2231); Ibn Mājah, as-
Sunan, b. of jihād (holy war) 3:354 (#2779); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh
(13:283 #5953); and Mizzī in Tuhfat-ul-ashrāf bi-ma‘rifat-il-atrāf
(9:428 #12810).
2. Abū Dāwūd related it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4284); Ibn
Mājah, as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:454 (#4086); Hindī,
Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (12:264#38662); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-
manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
20 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

quiet for a wh ile an d sa id: Allāh ’s Me ssen ger (A) ha s


sa id that a Ca liph (ie M ah dī) will appea r in th e la st day s
of my Ummah an d h e will give we alth in va st quantitie s
witho ut keep in g a reco r d of it.
“ Jur ayrī, the sub-narr ator, sa id: I a ske d Abū Na drah
an d Abū ‘ Alā ’: in yo ur op inion is ‘Um ar ibn ‘Abd- ul-
‘ Az īz, the Ca liph m entione d in the had īth ? T hey rep lie d:
No (this Caliph will be someon e othe r than ‘ Uma r ibn
‘ Abd- ul- ‘Az īz ).”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.11


‫ ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺩﻭﺍﻨﺎ‬
. ‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻭﺍﻨﺎ‬
“ Nar rate d by Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) that the
M essen ger of Allāh (A) said: T he Day of Judgm ent will
not com e until the e arth is fille d with tyranny, explo itation
an d r e bellion. Later, a pe rson (M ah dī) will be born from
amon g my ch ildr en who will f ill the ea rth with justice an d
e quity. (It me ans that the Day of Judgm ent will not come
be fore the appe aran ce of th e Ca liph Mah dī) as it wa s f ille d
with tyranny an d re bellion .”2

1. Muslim narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah


(turmoils and the conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2234 (67/2913);
and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330, 331).
Ahmad bin Hambal narrated it briefly in al-Musnad (3:38,
333).
2. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions o f
Bukhārī and Muslim in his al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8669), while
Dhahabī confirmed it.
Ahmad narrated it in al-Musnad (3:36); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh
(15:236 # 6823); and Abū Ya‘lā in al-Musnad (2:274 #987).
Haythamī transmitted it in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:132 # 1880)
with a sound chain of transmission.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 21

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.12


, ‫ ﺃﺸﻡ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ‬,‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺕ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ‬, ‫ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺇﺼﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻴﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺒﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺒﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﻘﺩ‬,‫ﻭﺒﺴﻁ ﻴﺴﺎﺭﻩ‬
.‫ﺜﻼﺜﺔ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh (A) sa id: Mah dī will be from my fam ily, his no se
will be po inte d an d high an d h is fo rehe a d will be bright
an d sh inin g. He will f ill the e arth with justice an d e quity,
just as ( be fore it) it ha d been fille d with tyranny an d
tran sgre ssion. T he Prophet ( A) said, “ he will live for ,”
then h e stretch e d o ut h is left (h an d), t wo fo ref in ger s an d
th um b of his r ight han d an d jo ine d the thre e (mean in g
M ah dī will live for eight ye ar s).”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.13


‫ ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻫﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻝﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ ﺭﺠﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
“ ‘Alī ( ) ha s r elate d it from the Prophet (A) : he
(A) sa id: If on ly on e day wa s to rem ain for th is wor ld to
st ay in tact ( Allāh will len gthen th e day an d) a p er son,
( calle d Mah dī) from my fam ily , will be born who will f ill
the wo rld with justice an d e quity just a s ( be fore h im) it
ha d been fille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion.”2

Haythamī copied it in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:313, 314) also,


and declared the men of Ahmad and Abū Ya‘lā thiqah
(trustworthy).
1. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:557 # 8670).
2. Abū Dāwūd related it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:87 (#4283); Ibn
Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37648); Hindī, Kanz-ul-

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
22 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Secti on 3
Imām Mahdī (D ) and Econo mic Justice
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.14
‫ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﻬﺔ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ‬,‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﻲ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﻴﻤﻠﻙ‬,‫ ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬:‫ﺍﻷﻨﻑ‬
.‫ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh (A) sa id: Mah dī will be from m e (ie from my
f amily), his fa ce will be br ight an d shin in g an d his no se
will be po inte d an d h igh. He will f ill the e arth with justice
an d fa irne ss just a s before him it wa s f ille d with tyranny
an d opp re ssion. ( Me anin g that befor e the ca liphate of
M ah dī, ty ranny an d exp lo itation sha ll re ign suprem e in the
wo rld an d the re will not be the slightest trac e of justice
an d e quity.)”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.15


‫ ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ‬,‫ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬,‫ﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ‬
.‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh (A) sa id: (Ne ar to the en d of tim e) the earth will
be f ille d with tyranny an d oppre ssion an d a pe rson will be

‘ummāl (14:267 # 38676); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-


tafsīr bil-ma‘thūr (6:58).
Ahmad bin Hambal related it with a little bit difference of
words in al-Musnad (1:99).
1. Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4285);
Khatīb Tabrīzī, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171
(#5454); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 23

born from amon g my ch ildren, an d he will r ule as Caliph


for sev en or n ine ye ar s. (Durin g h is ca liph ate) he will f ill
the earth with justice an d fa irne ss just a s it wa s prev io usly
f ille d with tyranny an d injustice. ”1

‫ )ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.16


‫ ﺤﺘﻰ( ﻻ ﻴﺠﺩ‬,‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺒﻼﺀ ﻴﺼﻴﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﺭﺠ ﻼ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﺠﺄ ﻴﻠﺘﺠﺊ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻅﻠﻡ‬
, ‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺼﺒﻪ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ﺒﺫﺭﻫﺎ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﺨﺭﺠﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺘﺘﻤﻨﻰ‬,‫ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻊ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ‬
. ‫ﺍﻷﺤﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍﺕ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﺒﺄﻫل ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻴﺭﻩ‬
“ Abū Sa‘ īd Kh udr ī ( ) say s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh (A) mention e d a gr eat te st that will f ace this
Ummah. A time will come when oppre ssion will be at
such a pe ak that there will not be any ref uge for any
M uslim. T hen Allāh will r aise someon e from amon gst my
ch ildren who will ref ill the earth with justic e an d fa irne ss
just a s it wa s f ille d with tyranny an d oppr e ssion befor e it.
All those livin g in the h eaven s an d e arth will be ple a se d
with h im. T he e arth will pro duc e as m uch a s possible, an d
Allāh will po ur do wn torrent ial ra in f rom the sky. Mah dī
will liv e in this e ra (of pro sper ity, e quity an d just ice) for
sev en, e ight or n ine y ear s. Pro spe rity will be on such a
h igh that the peop le at the tim e will wish that on ly if tho se

1. Related by Ahmad bin Hambal in al-Musnad (3:70).


Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions o f
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8674), while Dhahabī kept quiet
about it.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
24 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

who ha d pa sse d befo re them an d exp erienc e d m isery an d


oppr ession were alive .”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.17


‫ ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻝﻴﻠﺔ ﻝ ﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠ ﻙ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﺍﺴﻡ‬, ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬, ‫ﺍﻝﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﻭ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻸ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﺒﻲ‬
,‫ ﻭﻴﺠﻌل ﺍﷲ ﺍﻝﻐﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻭﻴﺔ‬
. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺵ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬, ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬
“ Nar rate d by ‘Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd ( 3!" $ % ‫ )ر(' ا‬that
M essen ger o f Allāh (A) sa id: if th ere wa s on ly on e night
left for this world to stay in ta ct, Allāh will len gthen it
until a mem ber of my fam ily becom es the r uler who se
nam e will be the same as my n ame an d the nam e of his
f ather will be the sam e a s the nam e of my f ather. He will
f ill the world with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s f ille d
with tyranny an d explo itation. He will distribute thin gs
e qually amon g the peop le an d Allāh will also fill the
he arts o f the Umm ah with content. He will r ule for seven
or n ine ye ars. T hen a fter the ca liph ate of Mah dī, ther e will
be a total en d to goo dne ss ( an d v irtue).”2

1. Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:465 # 8438); Azdī, al-Jāmi‘


(11:371); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:359 # 1041); Dānī, as-Sunan-
ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1049 # 563, 564); and Khatīb Tabrīzī in
Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 3:171 (#5457).
2. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Tabarānī, al-
Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:133, 135 # 10216, 10224); Dānī, as-Sunan-
ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1055 # 572); Haythamī, Mawārid-uz-
zam’ān (6:129 # 1877); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:269 #
38683).
Haythamī also narrated it through Abū Hurayarah ( ) in
Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:128 # 1876).
Suyūtī narrated it with a di fference of words at another place
in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 25

Section 4
Imām Mahdī (D ) and the Saints
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎﻝﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.18
‫ ﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻝﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻜ ﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﺼﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻡ‬,‫ﻜﻌﺩﺓ ﺃﻫل ﺒﺩﺭ‬
“ Umm Sa lamah ( !" $ %‫ )ر(' ا‬n arrate s that M essen ger
of Allāh (A) sa id: P eople exact ly e qual in n um be r to the
Compan ion s of Ba dr (ie 313) will tak e the oath of
a lle gianc e on the han d of a pe rson from my Ummah
(M ah dī) bet ween the Black Ston e an d the Station of
I br āhīm (maqām Ib rāhīm). Later on, the saint s o f I ra q an d
the abdā l ( Substit ute s) of Syria will also com e to him (to
give the o ath of a lle gianc e).”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬.19


‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬,‫ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻫﺎﺭﺒﺎ‬,‫ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
, ‫ﺨﺭﺠﻭﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﺭﻩ‬‫ ﻓﻴ‬, ‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﻤﻜﺔ‬, ‫ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻜﺔ‬
, ‫ﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﻌﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻡ‬‫ ﻭﻴ‬,‫ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﺫﻝ ﻙ‬,‫ﺨﺴﻑ ﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺒﻴﺩﺍﺀ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺭﺠل‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ‬,‫ﺃﺘﺎﻩ ﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺼﺎﺌﺏ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺍﻕ‬
, ‫ ﻓﻴﻅﻬﺭﻭ ﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ‬, ‫ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ ﺃﺨﻭﺍﻝﻪ ﻜﻠﺏ ﻓﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺜﺎ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل‬, ‫ ﻭﺍﻝﺨﻴﺒﺔ ﻝﻤ ﻥ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺸﻬﺩ ﻏﻨﻴﻤﺔ ﻜﻠﺏ‬, ‫ﻭﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻌﺙ ﻜﻠﺏ‬

1. Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:431 # 8328); Ibn Abī


Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:460 # 37223); Tabarānī, al-Mu‘jam-ul-
kabīr (23:296, 390 # 656, 930); Manāwī, Fayd-ul-qadīr (6:277);
Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (4:271, 272 # 38696); and Suyūtī in ad-
Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (5:241).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
26 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ ﻭﻴﻠﻘﻲ‬, ‫ﻭﻴﻌﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﺒﺴﻨﺔ ﻨﺒﻴﻬﻡ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬


‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﺘﻭﻓﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺒﺙ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻡ ﺒﺠﺭﺍﻨﻪ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
. ‫ﻭﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻠﻤﻭﻥ‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺎل‬.‫ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ ﻭ ﻗﺎل ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺸﺎﻡ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺃﺒﻭ ﺩﺍﻭﺩ‬
.‫ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ‬
“ Nar rate d by Umm Salamah ( !" $ %‫) ر (' ا‬, the wife of
the Prophet ( A), who says that the Me ssen ger of Allāh
( A) sa id: at the de ath o f a Caliph there will be a
differ enc e of op inion ( bet we en the M uslim s of Me dina
ove r the e le ction of the n e w Ca liph). One pe rson (that is,
M ah dī, r ea lisin g that the peop le might elect h im as the
c aliph) will leav e Me dina for Makk ah. Some of the
r esident s of Makk ah ( who will reco gn iz e him a s Mah dī)
will com e to him, an d br in g him o ut (of h is hom e) a ga inst
h is will; they will tak e the o ath (o f ca liph ate) on h is han d
bet ween the Bla ck Stone an d the Station of I brāh īm
(maqām Ibrāh īm). (Wh en the n e ws of his ca liph ate will
spre a d), an army will set o ut fro m Syria to wa ge war on
h im ( but befor e rea chin g him) it will be p ushe d do wn into
the (tree le ss) gro un d at Bay dā ’ bet ween M akkah an d
M e din a. T he abdā l ( Substit utes) of Sy ria an d the Sa ints of
Ir a q will take the oath o f caliphate on his han d. L ater, a
Quray shī (that is, Sufyān ī) per son, whose materna l
r elat ive s will be from the Ka lb tr ibe, will sen d an a rme d
for ce a ga in st them. T hey will p reva il over the inva din g
a rmy an d this will be the Battle o f Ka lb. One who ( doe s
not tak e p art in the Battle of Ka lb) ha s noth in g to do with
the booty will be in lo ss. (After this con que st) the Caliph
M āh dī will gen ero usly donate wea lth amon g the peop le
an d make th em fo llo w th e sunnah of the ir Prophet (A).
I slam will be f ully e sta blishe d on ea rth (ie Islam will be
dom inant an d a ccepte d all over the world) . Mah dī will
r ema in ( as Ca liph ) for sev en y ear s, then h e will die, an d
the M uslim s will atten d his f uner al.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 27

“ Abū Dā wūd said: som e tran sm itted from Hishām


“ nine year s” an d som e “ seven y ear s. ”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎﻝﺕ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬.20


,‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻲ ﻤﻜﺔ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﺨﺭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﺸﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻬﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺠﻴﺵ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻨﻪ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻡ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻴﻪ ﻋﺼﺎﺌﺏ‬,‫ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﻭﺍ ﺒﺎﻝﺒﻴﺩﺍﺀ ﺨﺴﻑ ﺒﻬﻡ‬,‫ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﺃﺨﻭﺍﻝﻪ ﻜﻠﺏ ﻓﻴﺠﻬﺯ‬, ‫ ﻭﻴﻨﺸﺄ ﺭﺠل ﺒﺎﻝﺸﺎﻡ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺍﻕ ﻭﺃﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻡ‬
, ‫ ﻓﺫﻝﻙ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻜﻠﺏ‬,‫ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺯﻤﻬﻡ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺠﻴﺵ‬
‫ ﻭﻴﻘﺴﻡ‬,‫ ﻓﻴﺴﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﻨﻭﺯ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺌﺏ ﻤ ﻥ ﺨﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﻤﺔ ﻜﻠﺏ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺒﺫﻝﻙ ﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ ﻭﻴﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻡ ﺒﺠﺭﺍﻨﻪ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬,‫ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل‬
.‫ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬:‫ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
“ Umm Sala mah ( !" $ %‫ )ر(' ا‬re late s: she hear d the
M essen ger of Allāh’ s (A) say: ther e will be diff eren ce
of op inion over the de ath of the c aliph (ie diff eren ce on
who sho uld be appointe d a s the next Ca liph . On see in g
this) a p er son from th e tr ibe o f Hā shim (fe arin g he may be
se lecte d to take the bur den o f the Caliphate) will le ave for
M akkah from Me dina. Som e p eople will come an d t ake
h im o ut of his ho use a lthough h e will r e sist it. T hen they

1. Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:89 (#4286);


Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (6:316); ‘Abd-ur-Razzāq, al-
Musannaf (11:371 # 20769); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musamaf (7:460
# 37219); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (12:369 # 6940 ); Tabarānī, al-
Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (23:390 # 931); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-
fitan (5:1083, 1084 # 595); Haythamī, Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:133
# 1881); Khatīb Tabrīzī, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh, b. of fitan (turmoils)
3:171 (#5456); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:265 # 38668); Suyūtī,
ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58); and Ibn ‘Asākir
in Tārīkh Dimashq al-kabīr (1:215, 216).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
28 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

will take the oath (of ca liphate ) on his h an d bet we en the


Black Ston e an d the Station of I brāh īm (maqām Ib rāhīm).
( On h ear in g the n e ws of their alle gianc e) an a rmy will set
o ut to war ds them from Syr ia but it will be cr ushe d into the
gro un d a s it r each es Bay dā’ ( a p la in bet we en Makk ah an d
M e din a). After this, the saints of Ir a q an d the abdā l
( Subst itute s) of Sy ria will ca ll on him . T hen a ( Sufyān ī)
pe rson will come from Sy ria, h is m aterna l r elative s
be lon gin g to th e Ka lb tribe, h e will de spatch his army to
wa ge war on him. Allāh will def eat them, r e sultin g in
them fa cin g a cata strophe. T his is the Battle o f Ka lb. So
anyon e who ( doe s not take part in the Battle of Kalb an d
a s a re sult) doe s not share in the booty, will be in lo ss.
T hen the ca liph Mah dī will discover tr ea sure s an d
distr ibute them genero usly ( amon g the people). I slam will
be f ully e sta blishe d on e arth. Peop le will live ( in this state
of pro sper ity an d comfo rt) for seven or n ine ye ar s (that is,
peop le will live in pe ace an d co mfort until the death of
M āh dī) .”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.21


. ‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺕ ﻴﺼﻠﺤﻪ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻲ ﻝﻴﻠﺔ‬:‫ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
“ ‘Alī ( ) re late s that the Me ssen ger o f Allāh (A)
sa id: Mah dī will be from my fam ily . Allāh will t urn h im
ove rnight into a r ighteo us per son (that is, thro ugh His
guidanc e, He will ra ise h im to the high e st leve ls of
sa inthood) .”2

1. Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (2:90 # 1175), al-


Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (23:390 # 930); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan, b. o f
Mahdī, 4:89 (#4287); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:158, 159 # 6757);
Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:431 # 8328); Azdī, al-Jāmi‘ (11:371); and
Haythamī in Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:133 # 1881).
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:315) that Tabarānī
related it in al-Awsat and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth.
2. Ibn Mājah rel ated this Hassan (fair) hadīth in as-Sunan, b. of fitan
(turmoils) 4:454 (#4085); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (1:84);
Bazzār, al-Musnad (2:243 # 644); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (1:359 #

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 29

Secti on 5
Imām Mahdī (D ) as Allāh’s Caliph
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺜﻭﺒﺎﻥ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.22
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ‬,‫ ﻴﻘﺘﺘل ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜﻨﺯﻜﻡ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
,‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻁﻠﻊ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺭﻕ‬, ‫ﻴﺼﻴﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ‬
. ‫ﻓﻴﻘﺘﻠﻭﻨﻜﻡ ﻗﺘﻼ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻘﺘﻠﻪ ﻗﻭﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻴﺘﻤﻭﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻩ ﻭﻝﻭ ﺤﺒﻭﺍ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬, ‫ﺜﻡ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻻ ﺃﺤﻔﻅﻪ‬
. ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻠﺞ‬
“ T hawbān ( ) narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of Allāh
(A) sa id: T hre e per son s will wa ge war nea r yo ur
trea sur e. All thr ee will be son s of the ca liph an d yet this
trea sur e will not be tran sf erre d to anyone of them . T hen
black f la gs will appea r fro m the ea st an d they will wa ge
wa r on yo u with such inten sity that no nat ion ha d wa ge d
wa r with such a ggre ssion befor e.
“ (T ha wbān ( ) say s:) then the M e ssen ger of Allāh
(A) sa id som ethin g ( wh ich I co uld not rem em ber .) T hen
the Prophet (A) said: when yo u p eople see h im, yo u
sho uld take the oath of a lle gian ce on his han d ev en if yo u
hav e to come dr a ggin g on sno w. In de e d h e will be the
Ca liph of Allāh, Mah dī.”1

465); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37644); Daylamī,


al-Firdaws (4:222# 6669); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-
tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).
1. Ibn Mājah narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:453
(#4084) with a sound chain of transmission and its men are
trustworthy.
Ahmad bin Hambal related it in al-Musnad (5:277); Ru’yānī,
al-Musnad (1:417#637); Dānī, as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan
(5:1032 # 548); Daylamī, al-Firdaws, (2:323#3740); Kinānī,
Misbāh-uz-zujājah (4:204, 205 # 2440); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl
(14:263 # 38658); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
30 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Ne cessary Clarifi cation : I bn Ha jar ‘Asqalān ī


comm ents in Fa th-ul-bā rī (13 :78, 79) wh ile quotin g this
tra dition: If the trea sur e mention e d in this tra dition is the
one ref erre d to by Abū Huray rah ( ) in this tra dit ion:

‫ ﻴﻭﺸﻙ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬


.‫ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺴﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻨﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻫﺏ‬
“ T he Me ssen ger of Allāh (A) sa id: T he t ime
is n ear when the r iver E uph rate s (hav in g drie d up)
will reve al a tre asure of gold. ”1
T hen th is tra dition c le arly in dicate s that the se ev ents
will o cc ur at the time of M ah dī’s appe aran ce.

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻲ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺤﺫﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.23


, ‫ ﻝﻭﻨﻪ ﻝﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺒﻲ‬, ‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺭﺠل ﻤ ﻥ ﻭﻝﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
, ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺨﺩﻩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﺨﺎل ﻜﺄﻨﻪ ﻜﻭﻜﺏ ﺩﺭﻱ‬, ‫ﻭﺠﺴﻤﻪ ﺠﺴﻡ ﺇ ﺴﺭﺍﺌﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺨ ﻼﻓﺘﻪ ﺃﻫل‬,‫ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﻻﹰ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍﹰ‬
. ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻝﻁﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝ ﺠﻭ‬

ma’thūr (6:58); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:515,


516).
Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions o f
Bukhārī and Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:463, 464 # 8432), while
Dhahabī confirmed it.
Hākim also narrated it with some different words at anoth er
place in al-Mustadrak (4:502#8531).
1. Bukhārī narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan (turmoils) 6:2605
(#6702); Muslim, as-Sahīh, b. of fitan wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah
(turmoils and the conditions of the Last Hour) 4:2219 (#30/2894);
Tirmidhī, al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh, chapters of sifat-ul-jannah (the
description of Paradise) 4:326 (#2569); Abū Dāwūd, as-Sunan,
book of malāhim, 4:98 (#4313); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad
(5:139, 140); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:87,88#6693,6694);
Baghawī, Sharh-us-sunnah (15:34#4239); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl
(14:203#38398); Suyūtī, ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr
(6:61); and Ibn ‘Asākir in Tārīkh Dimashq al-kabīr (7:234).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 31

“ Nar rate d by Hudh ayfah ( ) that the Me ssen ger of


Allāh (A) said: M ah dī will be from my fam ily . His
comp lex ion will be of an Ara b an d a physic al str ucture of
the children of Israe l. T her e will be a bea uty spot on his
r ight che ek. His app ear ance will be simila r to a lumino us
st ar. He will fill the e arth with justic e just a s it wa s f ille d
( before h im) with injustice. T hose in the earth an d the
he aven s will be plea se d with h is ca liph ate. T he bir ds in
the sk ie s will also be plea se d.”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.24


‫ ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻕ ﺒﻐﻴﺭ‬,‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬: ‫ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
.‫ﻋﺩﺩ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udrī ( ) r elates fro m the Prophet (A)
that he sa id: Near to the en d of tim e, a Ca liph (Mah dī)
will com e who will give the ir due r ights to the peop le
witho ut re cor din g it (ie witho ut k eepin g a r ecor d of who
ha s rec eiv e d wh at).”2

1. Suyūtī related it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:66); Daylamī, al-Firdaws


(4:221#6667); and ‘Ajlawnī in Kashf-ul-khifā’ wa muzīl-ul-ilbās
(2:381#2661).
2. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Ibn Abī Shaybah,
al-Musannaf (7:513 # 37640); Daylamī, al-Firdaws (5:501 #
8918); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:357 # 1032); and Suyūtī in ad-
Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
32 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Section 6
Imām Mahdī (D) and Islamic Dominance

‫ ﻜﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﻠﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﻔﻴل‬.25


‫ ﻓﻘﺎل ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻓﺴﺄﻝﻪ ﺭﺠل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺫﺍﻙ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ‬:‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻘﺩ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‬,‫ ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬:‫ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻤ ﻊ ﺍﷲ ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ ﻝﻪ ﻗﻭﻤﺎ‬, ‫ ﺍﷲ ! ﺍﷲ! ﻗﺘل‬: ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎل ﺍﻝﺭﺠل‬,‫ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺴﺘﻭﺤﺸﻭﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ‬, ‫ ﻴﺅﻝﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ‬, ‫ﻗﺯﻉ ﻜ ﻘﺯﻉ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺎﺏ‬
‫ ﻴﺩﺨل ﻓﻴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ ﺒﺩﺭ ﻝﻡ‬, ‫ﺃﺤﺩ ﻭﻻ ﻴﻔﺭﺤﻭﻥ ﺒﺄﺤﺩ‬
‫ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ‬, ‫ﻴﺴﺒﻘﻬﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻭﻥ ﻭﻻ ﻴﺩﺭﻜﻬﻡ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﻭﻥ‬
. ‫ﻁﺎﻝﻭﺕ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺠﺎﻭﺯﻭﺍ ﻤﻌﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺭ‬
: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬. ‫ ﻨﻌﻡ‬:‫ ﺃﺘﺭﻴﺩﻩ؟ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل ﺍﺒﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻨﻔﻴﺔ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻁﻔﻴل‬
‫ ﻭﺍﷲ! ﻻ‬,‫ ﻻ ﺠﺭﻡ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬.‫ﺇﻨﻪ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﺸﺒﺘﻴﻥ‬
. ‫ ﻓﻤﺎﺕ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻤﻜﺔ ﺤﺭﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﷲ ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬.‫ﺃﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺃﻤﻭﺕ‬
“ Abū T ufay l r elates from M uh amma d ibn Hanaf iyyah
that he said: We we re sitting in th e comp any of ‘Alī ( )
that a p er son a ske d him a bo ut M ah dī. ‘ Alī ( )
(p lea santly) sa id: go a way. T hen , co untin g seven on his
han d, he sa id: M ah dī will appe ar in the la st day s an d (the
dom inanc e of non-re ligio us for ce s will be at such a leve l
that) anyone m entionin g the n ame of Allāh will be kille d.
( At the tim e o f Mah dī’ s appe aran ce) Allāh will gather a
pa rty aro un d h im, just as the separ ate piec es of c lo ud a re
joine d to gether an d Allāh will c reate love (an d unity)
amon g th em. T hey will n either fe ar anyone nor will they
unne ce ssar ily favo ur anyone (m ean in g that they de al with
ev ery bo dy e qua lly). T he peop le who will gather ro un d the
c aliph will n um ber the Companion s who h a d tak en part in
the battle of Ba dr (that is, 313). T h is party will have a

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 33

spe cia l super ior ity which was not po sse sse d by anyone
be fore them no r will anyon e po sse ss it after them. T he
n um be r o f the p eople in this party will be the same a s the
Compan ion s of T ā lūt who ha d cro sse d th e ( Jor dan) cana l
in the comp any of T ā lūt.
“ Abū T uf ayl say s that M uhamm a d ibn Hanaf iyyah
a sk e d the a udienc e: Do yo u inten d to jo in th is party? I
sa id: ye s. He sa id, po intin g to war d the t wo p illars (of
Ka‘ bah ): T he appe aran ce o f c aliph Mah dī will tak e p la ce
bet ween them. At this, Abū T uf ayl said: By Go d! I shall
not leave them durin g my whole life . (T he n arr ator says) :
a ccor din gly , the death of Abū T uf ayl took p la ce in
M akkah. ”1

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻝﻬﻼﻝﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.26


– ‫ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺒﻌﺜﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﻕ! ﺇﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل ﻝﻔﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ‬,‫ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺤﺴﻴﻥ – ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺭﺠﺎ ﻭﻤﺭﺠﺎ ﻭﺘﻅﺎﻫﺭﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻥ ﻭﺘﻘﻁﻌﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺒل ﻭﺃﻏﺎﺭ ﺒﻌﻀﻬﻡ‬
‫ ﺒﻌﺙ‬, ‫ ﻓ ﻼ ﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻴﺭﺤﻡ ﺼﻐﻴﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺼﻐﻴﺭ ﻴ ﺅﻗﺭ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤ ﻥ ﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺤﺼﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻼﻝﺔ ﻭﻗﻠﻭﺒﺎ‬
, ‫ﻏﻠﻔﺎ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻤﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭل ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ‬
. ‫ﻭﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬
“ ‘Alī a l-Hilālī ( ) n arrate s that the Prophet (A) sa id
to Fātim ah ( !" $ % ‫ )ر(' ا‬: I swear by the One who ha s sent
me with the T ruth! Sure ly, the Mah dī of this Um mah will
be from amon g (the ch ildr en o f) the se t wo, that is, Ha ssan
an d Hussein . At a t ime when the wor ld will be subje ct to
ch ao s an d tur moil, roa ds will be c ut off an d peop le will
attack one another, no e lder ly will sho w lov e to the

1. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions o f


Bukhārī and Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:554 # 8659), while
Dhahabī confirmed it.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
34 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

yo un ge r an d no yo un gster will re spe ct the elderly , then


Allāh will sen d a pe rson from amon g the se t wo who will
con quer the fort s of disbelief an d open clo se d h earts. He
will e stablish I sla m in th e last days of the Ummah a s I
hav e e sta blishe d it in the ear ly day s (o f this Umm ah). He
will fill th e earth with justic e just a s it was form erly f ille d
with tyranny an d per se c ution. ”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.27


‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
,‫ ﻴﻨﺯل ﺍﷲ ﻋﺯ ﻭﺠل ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬,‫ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻭل ﺒﺴﻨﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﻝﻪ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻜﺘﻬ ﺎ‬
‫ ﻴﻌﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬
.‫ ﻭﻴﻨﺯل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﺱ‬,‫ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
“ Abū Sa ‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) h as nar rate d: I hea r d the
M essen ger of Allāh (A) say: A per son will appea r from
my fam ily who will pre ach my sunnah. Allāh will po ur
do wn ra in for h im from the sk ie s an d the earth will
disclo se (an d thro w o ut) its tr ea sure s for h im. T he earth
will be f ille d with justice an d f airn ess be ca use of him just
a s it wa s f ille d be fore h an d with tyranny an d per se c ution.
He will r ule th is Umm ah fo r sev en ye ar s an d he will
de scen d at the Ho ly Ho use ( Bayt- ul- M uqa ddas) .”2

‫ ﺤﺩﺜﻨﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﺒﻭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.28


‫ ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ‬: ‫ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺴﻡ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬

1. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:66,67); Tabarānī, al-


Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (3:57, 58 # 2675), al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (7:276,
277 # 6536); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (9:165).
2. Suyutī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:62); Tabarānī, al-
Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (2:47# 1079); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz-
zawā’id (7:317).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 35

‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻀﺭﺒﻬﻡ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺭﺠﻌﻭﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ‬


. ‫ﺍﻝﺤﻕ‬
‫ ﻭﻜﻡ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ؟‬: ‫ﻗﻠﺕ‬
. ‫ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﻭﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
“ Abū Hur ayrah ( ) ha s na rrate d: My be love d Abū a l-
Qā sim (A) sa id to me : T he Day of Judgement will not
com e until a p er son appe ar s from my fam ily who will
con front the peop le until they t urn to the tr uth. I said:
Ho w lon g will he r ule for ? He said: Fiv e an d t wo
(y ear s). ”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.29


‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬
. ‫ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ! ﻝﻴﻌﻭﺩﻥ‬:‫ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
“ Nar rate d by Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ( 3!"$ %‫ )ر(' ا‬that
M essen ger of Allāh ( A) sa id: T here will be a c aliph in
my Umm ah who will genero usly distribute wea lth without
ke epin g a re cor d of it. An d I swear by the One who
contro ls my life! Certa inly th at the dom inanc e (of I slam)

1. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:62); Abū Ya‘lā, al-


Musnad (12:19 # 6665); and ‘Asqalānī in al-Matālib-ul-‘āliyah
(4:343 #4554).
Haythamī says in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:315) that Abū Ya‘lā
narrated it and Abū Zur‘ah decl ared the sub-narrator, Marjā bin
Rijā’, trustworthy, while Ibn Mu‘īn weakened him, and its other
men are trustworthy.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
36 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ec aptur e it s lo st glo ry an d


r etriev e it s status dur in g h is re ign). ”1

1. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions o f


Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:454 # 8400), while Dhahabī kept quiet
about it.
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that B azzār had
related it, and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth.
Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:362 # 1055); Suyūtī,
ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:56); and B ayhaqī in
Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330,331).
Muslim related it with di fferent words in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan
wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and conditions of the Last Hour)
4:2234 (#67/2913); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:317); Hindī,
Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38659); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah
wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\04-


Awaited Imam-01 (15-36).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 37

Section 7
Econo mic Pros perity and Fair
Distribution o f We alth

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.30


‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺴﻘﻴﻪ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ﺍﷲ ﺍﻝﻐﻴﺙ ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻨﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ ﻭﺘﻜﺜﺭ‬
. ‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺸﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻨﻴﺎ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) ha s narr ate d that the
M essen ger of Allāh ( A) sa id: Mah dī will be bo rn dur in g
the la st day s of my Ummah . Allāh will po ur do wn h eavy
r ain durin g his ca liphate an d the e arth will gro w it s
pro duce in a bun dance , an d h e will distr ibute thin gs
e qually amon g the peop le. Dur in g his reign there will be
p lenty of cattle an d th e Ummah will be he ld in great
e stee m. (After becom in g the caliph) he will liv e for seven
or eight y ear s.”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬: ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.31


‫ ﺃﺒﺸﺭﻜﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﻭﺯﻻﺯل‬
, ‫ ﻴﺭﻀﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺴﺎﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬, ‫ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬
. ‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﻴﻤﻸ‬, ‫ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻭﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬:‫ ﻤﺎ ﺼﺤﺎﺤﺎ ؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ﻓﻘﺎل ﻝﻪ ﺭﺠل‬
‫ﺍﷲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻏﻨﻰ ﻭﻴﺴﻌﻬﻡ‬

1. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) in al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8673 ),


while Dhahabī con firmed it.
Hindī transmitted it in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:273 # 38700); and
Albānī in Silsilat-ul-ahādīth-is-sahīhah (2:336 # 711).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
38 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺠﺔ ؟‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻋﺩﻝﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺄﻤﺭ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻓﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ‬


‫ ﺍﺌﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻓﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﺇﻻ ﺭﺠل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ‬
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻝﻪ‬,‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺄﻤﺭﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻌﻁﻴﻨﻲ ﻤﺎﻻ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘل ﻝﻪ‬.‫ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ ﻜﻨﺕ ﺃﺠﺸﻊ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬. ‫ﺃﺤﺙ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺠﺭﻩ ﻭﺃﺒﺭﺯﻩ ﻨﺩﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺭﺩﻩ ﻓ ﻼ ﻴﻘﺒل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻨﻔﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺠﺯ ﻋﻨﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻭﺴﻌﻬﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺫﻝ ﻙ ﺴﺒﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬,‫ ﺇﻨﺎ ﻻ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺸﻴﺎ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﻨﺎﻩ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺎل ﻝﻪ‬,‫ﻤﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺃﻭ‬,‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﺵ ﺒﻌﺩﻩ‬,‫ﺃﻭ ﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻊ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬
. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩﻩ‬: ‫ﻗﺎل‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) ha s narr ate d that the
M essen ger o f Allāh ( A) sa id: I am givin g yo u the goo d
ne ws of the co min g of Mah dī who will be sent do wn at a
tim e wh en my Ummah will fa ll prey to disp utes an d chao s.
He will f ill the earth with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it
wa s fille d ( befor e him) with oppre ssion an d per se c ution.
T hose in the e arth an d h eaven s will be ple a se d with h im.
He will distribute thin gs e qua lly amon g the peop le ( ie he
will not discrim inate a gain st anyon e). Allāh ( durin g his
c aliphate) will fill the hea rts o f my Umm ah with
gen ero sity. He will prov ide justic e to a ll ( witho ut any
discrim inat ion or pref eren ce). He will ask h is anno unc er
to anno unc e that if anyone re quir e d anythin g (they sho uld
com e to Mah dī. On he ar in g this anno un cement) no one
from amon g the M uslim s ex cept on e p er son will stan d up.
M ah dī will a sk h im to go to the tre asur er an d tell h im that
M ah dī h as o r der e d yo u to give me som e goo ds. (T he man
will go to the tr ea surer ), the tre a sure will say to him : take
a s m uch a s yo u want. He will take (a s m uch a s he wishe s)
an d will come o ut of th e trea sury . He will, at that moment,
be a sh ame d (of his act) an d ( will say to him se lf) , am I the
gr ee die st per son in M uhamma d’s Ummah, or he will say
to h im se lf that wh ich is eno ugh for other s is not eno ugh
for me . ( Fe elin g guilty of his act) he will want to ret urn

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 39

the goo ds but it will not be tak en back . He will be told


that, onc e we have given som ethin g we do not tak e it
ba ck. So Mah dī will live for sev en, eight o r nin e y ear s
with this justice an d fa irne ss an d distribution of we alth.
T hen after h is ( death) ther e will be no goo dne ss
( comforta ble lif e) for the liv in g to en joy.”1

‫ ﺫﻜﺭ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.32


‫ ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ‬: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬, ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﺍﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
. ‫ ﻭﻝﻴﻤﻸﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
“ Abū Huray rah ( ) h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of
Allāh ( A) sa id wh ile m entionin g Mah dī: At min im um,
the duration of the ca liph ate of M ah dī will be sev en ye ar s.
It c an a lso be e ight o r nin e year s. He will fill the earth
with justic e an d f airn e ss just as it wa s f ille d with tyranny
an d oppre ssion befor e it. ”2

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.33


‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬
. ‫ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ! ﻝﻴﻌﻭﺩﻥ‬:‫ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
“ Nar rate d by Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ('(*+- .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬that
the M essen ger of Allāh ( A) sa id: T here will be a caliph
in my Um mah who will genero usly distribute wealth
witho ut k eep in g a r ecor d of it. An d I swe ar by the One

1. Ahmad bin Hambal relat ed it in al-Musnad (3:37, 52); and Suyūtī


in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:57).
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:313,314) that
Tirmidhī had narrated it briefly, while Ahmad copied it through his
chain of transmission, and Abū Ya‘lā also narrated it briefly and
the men of Ahmad and Abū Ya‘lā are trustworthy.
2. Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that Bazzār had
narrated it, and his men are trustworthy.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
40 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

who controls my life! Certa inly , the dom inan ce (of I slam)
will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ec aptur e it s lo st glo ry an d
r etriev e it s status dur in g h is re ign). ”1

‫ ﺃ ﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.34


‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬, ‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝ ﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
, ‫ ﻴﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
, ‫ﻴﺭﺴل ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﺎﺕ‬
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺠل‬, ‫ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬
.‫ﺨﺫﻩ‬
“ Abū Hurayr ah ( ) ha s relate d that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh ( A) sa id: ther e will be Mah dī in my Ummah . If
(the dur ation of his caliphate is a) short (per io d) then it
will be seven y ear s, other wise, it will be e ight or n ine
ye ar s. T he pro spe rity of my Umm ah will be at such a h igh,
the lik es of which not exper ien ce d by it in the pa st. Ra in
will po ur do wn from the sky ( a s nee de d), the earth will
gro w a s m uch crop a s po ssible an d there will be no
shorta ge of we alth. A p er son will stan d an d say: O Mah dī!
Give me somethin g. M ah dī will say him : tak e it yo ur se lf
(fro m the trea sury ac cor din g to yo ur de sire s). ”2

1
. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:454 # 8400), while Dhahabī kept quiet
about it.
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that B azzār had
related it, and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth.
Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:362 # 1055); Suyūtī,
ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:56); and B ayhaqī in
Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330,331).
Muslim related it with di fferent words in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan
wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and conditions of the Last Hour)
4:2234 (#67/2913); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:317); Hindī,
Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38659); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah
wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).
2. Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (6:193 # 5402).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 41

‫ ﺃ ﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.35


‫ ﺇ ﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬, ‫ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﺘﺅﺘﻰ ﺃﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬, ‫ ﻓﺘﻨﻌﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻗﻁ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
, ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺠل‬,‫ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬,‫ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ‬
. ‫ ﺨﺫ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udrī ( ) h a s re late d that the M essen ger
of Allāh (A) said: T here will be Mah dī in my Ummah
who will be th e c aliph for at lea st seven year s, other wise
for n ine y ear s. My Um mah will be so pro spero us in his
pe rio d that it wo uld not have exper ien ce d such p rosp erity
be fore it. T he ea rth will gro w every form of crop an d ho ld
ba ck nothin g. Durin g this p erio d goo ds will be in such a
h igh quantity as a h eap of gr ain on th e thre sh in g f loor.
So meone will stan d up an d say: O Mah dī! Give me
somethin g. He will say : T ake (a s m uch yo u like ).”1

‫ ﺨﺸﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭ ﻥ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺩﺭﻱ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬.36


: ‫ ﻓﻘﺎل‬,‫ ﻓﺴﺄﻝﻨﺎ ﻨﺒﻲ ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬,‫ﺒﻌﺩ ﻨﺒﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺩﺙ‬
― ‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺠﻲﺀ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬.‫ ﺴﻨﻴﻥ‬: ‫ ﻭﻤﺎ ﺫﺍﻙ؟ ﻗﺎل‬: ‫ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ‬: ‫ﺯﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻙ ― ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﻝﻪ ﻓﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬. ‫ ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬, ‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ! ﺃﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ﺭﺠل‬
. ‫ﺜﻭﺒﻪ ﻤﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻁﺎﻉ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﻤﻠﻪ‬

Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:317) that Tabarānī


narrated it in al-Awsat and his men are trustworthy.
1. Ibn Mājah narrat ed this Hassan (fai r) hadīth in as-Sunan, b. o f
fitan (turmoils) 4:453 (#4083); Ibn Abī Shaybah, al-Musannaf
(7:512, 513 # 37638); Hākim, al-Mustadrak (4:558 # 8675); Dānī,
as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1035, 1036 # 550); and Ibn Kathīr
in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (10:37).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
42 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

“ Abū Sa‘ īd Kh udrī ( ) narr ates: W e a sk e d the Prophet


( A) a bo ut happen in gs a fter h im. We a ske d him : What
will h appen after yo u? He sa id: T here will be Mah dī in my
Ummah who will r ule for fiv e, o r seven or n ine , (the
na rrator is do ubtful a bo ut the corr ect per io d). I a ske d:
wh at is meant by this figur e? He sa id: (this f igure m ean s)
ye ar s. He said: (his p erio d will be a pe rio d of ble ssin g an d
pro sper ity.) A p er son will com e over to him an d a sk him :
O M ah dī! Give m e someth in g, give me som ethin g. So
M ah dī will giv e h im a s m any goo ds a s h e will be a ble to
c arry. ”1

1. Tirmidhī related this Hassan (fai r) hadīth in al-Jāmi‘-us-sahīh,


chapters of fitan (turmoils) 4:86 (#2232); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-
Musnad (3:21, 22); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:262 # 38654); and
Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah wan-nihāyah (10:37).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 43

Section 8
Imām Mahdī (D ) will be welco med with
Open Arms
‫ ﺤﺩﺜﻨﻲ ﻓ ﻼﻥ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻤﺠﺎﻫﺩ‬ .37
‫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻘﺘل‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻗﺘﻠﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻜﻴﺔ ﻏﻀﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ ﻓﺯﻓﻭﻩ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺘﺯﻑ‬,‫ ﻓﺄﺘﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﻤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻴﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻌﺭﻭﺱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺯﻭﺠﻬﺎ ﻝﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺭﺴﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺘﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ‬, ‫ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻭﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻨﺒﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺘﻤﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﻁﺭﻫﺎ‬
. ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﻴﺘﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻝﻡ ﺘﻨﻌﻤﻬﺎ ﻗﻁ‬
“ (T he famo us tab i‘ ī ( Suc ce ssor)) M ujāh id h as na rrate d
that a Comp anion sa id: (T he ca liph) M ah dī will appe ar
a fter the m ur der of ‘Naf s Zak iyyah’ . When ‘ Naf s
Z akiyy ah’ is m ur der e d, those in the heav en s an d the earth
will be an gry with the m ur derer s. Later, the p eople will
com e to Mah dī an d br in g him ( with gr eat pomp an d sho w)
a s the br ide is carr ie d to her groom on we ddin g night. He
will fill th e e arth with e quity an d justice . ( Durin g his
c aliphate) the ea rth will gro w it s crop s as the sk ie s po ur
do wn p lenty o f rain . Dur in g h is r ule my Ummah will be
ble sse d with so many favo ur s that it ha s nev er been
ble sse d before. ”1
Ne ce ssary Clarification: A m an kno wn as Naf s
Z akiyy ah wa s M uhamma d ibn ‘ Abdullāh ibn
Husse in ibn ‘ Alī ibn Abī T ālib who r evolte d
a gain st Abbasid c aliph M an sūr in 145 AH an d wa s
ma rtyre d. T he tra dit ion do es not r efer to h im. He re
Naf s Z akiyy ah stan ds for some other sa int who
will come befor e Imām Mah dī.

1. Related by Ibn Abī Shaybah in al-Musannaf (7:514 # 37653).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
44 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ ﺃﻥ ﺭ ﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .38


‫ ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ‬,‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺃﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
, ‫ ﻴﻨﻌﻡ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻨﻌﻤﺔ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻨﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ‬,‫ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‬
, ‫ﻴﺭﺴل ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻤﺩﺭﺍﺭﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺘﺩﺨﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺸﻴﺌﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﺎﺕ‬
: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ! ﺍﻋﻁﻨﻲ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬, ‫ ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺠل‬, ‫ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﻜﺩﻭﺱ‬
.‫ﺨﺫﻩ‬
“ Abū Huray rah ( ) h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of
Allāh (A) said: ther e will be Mah dī in my Ummah who
will r ule fo r sev en y ear s if the pe rio d is short, other wise
for eight or nine yea rs. Dur in g M ah dī’ s p er io d, my
Ummah will be so p rosp ero us that it will not h ave
exp erienc e d such pro sper ity before it. T he sky will po ur
do wn tor rential rain an d the ea rth will y ield it s entire
pro duce. Goo ds will be ly in g like a he ap of gra in s on the
thre shin g f loor. One man will stan d up an d say: O Mah dī:
give m e somethin g. So he will say: t ake ( a s m uch a s yo u
like ).”1

‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﺃﻤﻨﺎ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .39


‫ ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ‬,‫ ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻴﺭﻨﺎ؟ ﻓﻘﺎل‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﻨﻘﺫﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻘﺫﻭﺍ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻝﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻝﻑ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺼﺒﺤﻭ ﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ‬
. ‫ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﺒﺤﻭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﻬﻡ‬
Narr ated by ‘ Alī ( ) , he sa id: I sa id (to the Prophet
( A)) : O M e ssen ger of Allāh (357 ‫ و‬9; 5- .‫= ا‬5?)! W ill

1. Tabarānī related it in al-Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (6:193 # 5402).


Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:317) that Tabarānī
narrated it in al-Awsat and his men are trustworthy.

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 45

M ah dī be from us, the fam ily of M uh amma d or from


other s? He said: no, but h e will be from amon g us, Allāh
will re-e sta blish I slam thro ugh h im as he did so ( in the
be ginnin g) through us. T he se peop le will be re sc ue d from
m ischief thro ugh us (Mah dī) a s they h ave been save d from
po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur mean s (M ah dī) Allāh will
c reate lov e in their he arts after the h atre d of m isch ief a s
He cre ate d love in the ir hea rts after the hatre d of
po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur me ans peop le will be come
brother ly amon gst e ach othe r after th e r iva lry of t urmo ils
a s they have done so in I slam after the riv alry of
po lytheism." 1

1. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī, al-


Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (1:136 # 157); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:370,
371 # 1089, 1090); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:316,
317).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
46 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Secti on 9
Prophet ‘Īs ā (D) and Imām M ahdī (D)
‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﻫﺭﻴﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .40
,‫ ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺘﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺯل ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻜﻡ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ ﻤﻨﻜﻡ‬
“ Abū Huray rah ( ) h a s na rrate d that the M e ssen ger of
Allāh (A) said: what will be the state (o f yo ur joy ) at
the time wh en ‘ Īsā ibn Mary am will descen d (from the
he aven s) an d yo ur Imām will be f rom amon g yo u.”1
Ex planation: It me ans that ‘Ī sā (D ), at the t ime
of descent, will o ffer h is pray er s in con gr e gation
but he himself will not be the Imām but a mem ber
of the Um mah, that is, c aliph M ah dī. Acco r din gly,
I bn Ha jar ‘Asqalānī with refe renc e to Abū a l-
Ha ssan Āburrī’ s Manāq ib a sh-Shāfi‘ ī wr ite s: the re
a re contin uo us tr a dition s in its support an d ‘Ī sā
(D) will offe r one praye r beh in d c aliph M ah dī.2

‫ ﺃﺨﺒﺭﻨﻲ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﺯﺒﻴﺭ؛ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺴﻤﻊ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺠﺭﻴﺞ‬ .41
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬:‫ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﻁﺎﺌﻔﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻕ‬: ‫ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬

1. Bukhārī related it in as-Sahīh, b. of ambiyā’ (proph ets) 3:1272


(#3265); Muslim, as-Sahīh, b. of īmān (faith) 1:136 (#155); Ibn
Hibbān, as-Sahīh (15:213#6802); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad
(2:336); Abd-ur-Razzāq, al-Musannaf (11:400#20841); Ibn
Mundah, al-Īmān (1:516 # 415, 416); Abū ‘Awānah, al-Musnad
(1:99#315); Baghawī, Sharh-us -sunnah (15:82#4277); ‘Asqalānī,
Fath-ul-bārī (6:491), al-Isābah fī tamyīz-is-sahābah (4:766),
Taghlīq-ut-ta‘līq (4:40); Qurtubī, al-Jāmi‘ li-ahkām-il-Qur’ān
(4:101; 16:106); Ibn Kathīr, Tafsīr-ul-Qur’ān al-‘azīm (1:578); and
Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’ thūr (2:242).
2. ‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (6:493, 494).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 47

‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻴﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻴﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺎﻤﺔ‬


, ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺒﻌﻀﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺃﻤﺭﺍﺀ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬. ‫ ﺘﻌﺎل ! ﺼل ﻝﻨﺎ‬:‫ﺃﻤﻴﺭﻫﻡ‬
.‫ﺘﻜﺭﻤﺔ ﺍﷲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬
“ Nar rate d by I bn Jurayh : Abū Z ubayr r eporte d to me :
He he ar d Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ('(*+ - .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬say in g: I
he ar d the M e ssen ger of Allāh ( A) sayin g: A section of
my peop le will not cea se f ightin g for the T ruth
suc ce ssf ully till the Day of Re surr ection. He said: ‘Īsā ibn
M aryam wo uld then de sc en d an d the le a der of the
M uslim s will say : come an d le a d us in pray er, but he will
say : “ No, som e amon gst yo u are le a der s over other s. T his
is th e hono ur from Allāh for this n ation” (ie proph et ‘Ī sā
(D ) will de cline the off er of le a din g the pr ayer due to the
h igh status given by Allāh to this Umm ah).”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ .42


‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺨﻔﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ‬: ‫― ﻭﺫﻜﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺠﺎل ― ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻴﺎ ﺃﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ! ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻨﻌﻜﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺨﺭﺠﻭﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﺫﺍﺏ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺭ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻫﻡ ﺒﻌﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ‬, ‫ ﻓﻴﻨﻁﻠﻘﻭﻥ‬, ‫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺭﺠل ﺠﻨﻲ‬: ‫ﺍﻝﺨﺒﻴﺙ؟ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻝﻭﻥ‬
‫ ﻝﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬:‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﷲ! ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﺎل ﻝﻪ‬,‫ ﻓﺘﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻼﺓ‬,‫ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻝﺼﺒﺢ ﺨﺭﺠﻭﺍ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ‬,‫ ﻓﻠﻴﺼل ﺒﻜﻡ‬,‫ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ‬
. ‫ﻓﺤﻴﻥ ﻴﺭﻯ ﺍﻝﻜﺫﺍﺏ ﻴﻨﻤﺎﺙ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻨﻤﺎﺙ ﺍﻝﻤﻠﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺀ‬

1. Muslim narrated it in as-Sahīh, b. of īmān (faith) 1:137 (#156);


Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:345,384); Ibn Hibbān, as-Sahīh
(15:231,232#6819); Abū Ya‘lā, al-Musnad (4:59#2078); Ibn
Mundah, al-Īmān (1:517#418); Ibn Jārūd, al-Muntaqā (1:257
#1031); Abū ‘Awānah, al-Musnad (1:99 # 317); and Bayhaqī in
as-Sunan-al-kubrā (9:180).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
48 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ('(*+- .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬narr ates that the


M essen ger of Allāh (A) sa id: wh en I slam (ie the state of
the Ummah) becom e s weak, Da jjā l will appea r — an d
a fter givin g details a bo ut Da jjāl — h e sa id: After some
tim e, ‘Ī sā ibn Ma ryam will de scen d (from the heav en) an d
in the mo rnin g (that is, at pre - da wn ) h e will c all o ut: O
peop le! What is stoppin g yo u f rom f ightin g with th is evil
pr etender (Dajjā l)? Peop le will say: h e appea rs to be a
supern atur al cr eation (jinn), but a s they will move for war d
they will see ‘Ī sā (D) . T hen it will be time for pr ayer, so
their lea der will say: O Allāh’s Sp irit: come fo r war d (an d
lea d the pray er). He will say : “ Your I mām sho uld lea d
yo u” (an d at that time the Im ām will be M ah dī) . Wh en the
peop le will f inish the ir Da wn p rayer , they will le ave
( un der the lea der ship of ‘Ī sā (D)) to f ight Dajjā l. When
‘Ī sā will se e the L iar (Dajjā l), he ( ie Dajjā l, o ut of fe ar)
will start me ltin g a s sa lt melt s in water.”1

‫ ﻓﻘﺎﻝﺕ‬, ‫ ﻤﺭﻓﻭﻋﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺃﻤﺎﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻫﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .43


‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﻓﺄﻴﻥ‬:‫ﺃﻡ ﺸﺭﻴﻙ ﺒﻨﺕ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻡ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻗﻠﻴل ﻭﺠﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ‬:‫ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺏ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ؟ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ ﻗﺩ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﺒﺢ ﺇﺫ ﻨﺯل‬,‫ﺭﺠل ﺼﺎﻝﺢ‬
‫ ﻓﺭﺠ ﻊ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻹﻤﺎﻡ ﻴﻨﻜﺹ ﻴﻤﺸﻲ‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻀﻊ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻴﺩﻩ ﺒﻴﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻘﻬﻘﺭﻱ ﻝﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ‬, ‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﻝﻙ ﺃﻗﻴﻤﺕ‬,‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ! ﻓﺼل‬:‫ ﺜﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل ﻝﻪ‬,‫ﻜﺘﻔﻴﻪ‬
. ‫ﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ‬

1. Ahmad bin Hambal related it in al-Musnad (3:367,368); Haythamī,


Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:343,344); Hindī, Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:325,
326#38819); and Suyūtī in ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-
ma’thūr (2:242,243).
Hākim gradid it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions of
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:530#8613).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 49

“ Abū Umāmah Bāhilī ( ) ha s re late d (a lon g


tra dition) from the Me ssen ge r o f Allāh (A) in which a
f ema le Compan ion Umm Shar īk bint ‘ Abī a l-‘ Akar ( 01‫ر‬
'*+ - .‫ )ا‬said: O M essen ger o f Allāh (357‫ و‬96D‫ و‬9 ;5- .‫= ا‬5?)!
Wher e will the Ara bs be at that time, ( why will the Ara bs
not come o ut in support of the Ummah )? T he M essen ger
of Allāh (A) said: the Ara bs will be in sma ll n um ber,
an d mo st o f these will be in the Sacr e d Ho use an d the ir
Im ām will be a high ly p io us p er son (n ame d Mah dī). When
their Im ām will co me for war d for Da wn pr ayer, at that
tim e ‘Ī sā will de sc en d (f rom the heav en). T he Imām will
r etreat an d give way to h im so that ‘Ī sā can lea d people in
the pray er. ‘Ī sā p la cin g h is h an d bet we en the Imām’ s
sho ulder s will say : step for war d an d le a d the pray er
be ca use the iqāmah was sa id fo r yo u. T hen the ir Imām
(M ah dī) will lea d the pray er. ”1

:‫ ﻤﺭﻓﻭﻋﺎ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﺹ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .44


: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻝﻪ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬,‫ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺠﺭ‬
‫ ﺇﻨﻜﻡ ﻤﻌﺸﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ﺃﻤﺭﺍﺀ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬.‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﻭﺡ ﺍﷲ ! ﻓﺼل ﺒﻨﺎ‬,‫ﺘﻘﺩﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻓﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺒﻬﻡ‬.‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﻨﺕ ﻓﺼل ﺒﻨﺎ‬,‫ﺒﻌﻀﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬
“ Uthmān ibn Abī a l-‘ Ās ( ) dir ectly n arrate s that the
M essen ger of Allāh (A) sa id: prophet ‘Ī sā ibn Ma ryam
will de scen d (from th e h eaven ) at the t ime of Da wn pray er
( fajr) an d the lea de r of the peop le will re quest him : O
Allāh’ s Sp ir it! ( Com e for war d an d) lea d us in pr ayer . ‘Ī sā
will say : “ yo u are the peop le of M uh amma d’ s Umm ah.
So me amon gst yo u ar e le a der s ov er other s. So move

1. Related by Ibn Mājah in as-Sunan, b. of fitan (turmoils) 4:446,447


(#4077).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
50 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

for war d an d lea d us in praye r.” T he lea der of the M uslim s


will come for war d an d lea d the p rayer .”1

‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭﻭ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .45


.‫ ﻭﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘ Amr ( ) says that ‘Ī sā (D) will
de scen d after M ah dī an d will o ffer (on e) pr ayer beh in d
h im.”2

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .46


.‫ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
“ Abū Sa‘īd Kh udr ī ( ) narr ate s that the Me ssen ger of
Allāh (A) sa id: ther e will be a per son from this Ummah
an d ‘Ī sā ibn M aryam (‫م‬EF6‫ ;*(' ا‬5- ) will pr ay beh in d h im.”3

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺤﺫﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .47


‫ ﻴﻠﺘﻔﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ! ﺼل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻜﺄﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻁﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺸﻌﺭﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺀ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﺨﻠﻑ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ‬.‫ ﺇﻨﻤﺎ ﺃﻗﻴﻤﺕ ﺍﻝﺼﻠﻭﺓ ﻝﻙ‬:‫ﻓﻴﻘﻭل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ‬
. ‫ﻭﻝﺩﻱ‬
“ Hudhayf ah ( ) r elate s th at the M essen ger o f Allāh
(A) sa id: When M ah dī will appe ar ‘Ī sā ibn M aryam will
de scen d an d it will seem a s tho ugh water is droppin g from

1. Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:478#8473); Ahmad bin


Hambal, al-Musnad (4:217); and Tabarānī in al-Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr
(9:60#8392).
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:342,343) that Ahmad
and Tabarānī had related it and the men of Ahmad were those of
sound hadīth.
2. Ibn Hammād narrat ed it in al-Fitan (1:373#1103); and Suyūtī in
al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:78).
3. Ibn Qayyim transmitted it in al-Manār-ul-munīf (1:147 # 337); and
Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 51

h is h air. At that tim e Mah dī, a ddr e ssin g him , will say :
p lea se come for war d an d le a d the peop le in pray er.
Prophet ‘ Īsā will say : the iqāmah wa s sa id for yo u;
there fore, yo u will lea d the pr ayer. Ac cor din gly, ‘ Īsā will
off er this pr ayer beh in d a m an from my f amily (M ah dī).”1

‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ‬, ‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﺴﻴﺭﻴﻥ‬ .48


.‫ﻴﺅﻡ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
“ I bn Sīrīn r elates that (Imām ) Mah dī will be from this
Ummah an d will le a d ‘ Īsā ibn Mary am ('(*+ - . ‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬in
pr ayer. ”2

1. Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:81).


2. Ibn Abī Shaybah narrated it in al-Musannaf (7:513#37649); and
Ibn Hammād in al-Fitan (1:373#1107).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
52 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Secti on 10
Obedience of Imām Mahdī (D ) will be
Co mpulsory
‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺸﻬﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺤﻭﺸﺏ‬ .49
:‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺭﻡ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
‫ ﻓ ﻲ‬, ‫ ﻓﺎﺴﻤﻌﻤﻭﺍ ﻝﻪ ﻭﺃﻁﻴﻌﻭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﻻ! ﺇﻥ ﺼﻔﻭﺓ ﺍﷲ ﻤﻥ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ ﻓﻼﻥ‬
. ‫ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻌﻤﻌﺔ‬
“ Shah r ibn Ha wsha b ( ) n arrate s that the M essen ger
of Allāh (A) said: In (the month of) M uh arra m, an
anno un cer will ca ll o ut from the heav en: be ware ! Sure ly,
( be inform e d that) such a pe rson h as be en cho sen by
Allāh, so listen to h im an d o bey him dur in g the ye ar of
upro ar an d turmo il.”1

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ .50


‫ ﻭﻤﻥ‬,‫ ﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‬
“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ('(*+- .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬narr ates that the
M essen ger of Allāh (A) said: whoeve r den ie s (the
com in g of ) Dajjā l, h as sure ly comm itted disbe lief, an d
who ever denie s (the com in g of) Mah dī ha s ( also)
comm itte d disbelief. ”2

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .51


‫ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬,‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃ ﺴﻪ ﻋﻤﺎﻤﺔ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻓﺎﺘﺒﻌﻭﻩ‬,‫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ‬

1. Ibn Hammād related it in al-Fitan (1:226,338#630,980); and


Suyūtī copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:76).
2. Related by Suyutī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:83).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 53

“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘Uma r ('(*+ - .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬n arr ates that the
M essen ger of Allāh (A) said: Mah dī will come an d the re
will be a t ur ban on h is hea d. T here will be an anno unc er
who will pro claim : this is M ah dī, Allāh’ s c aliph, so fo llo w
an d o bey h im. ”1

1. Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī,


Musnad ash-shāmiyyīn (2:71#937); and Dayl amī in al-Firdaws
(5:510#8920).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
54 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Secti on 11
Circumstances Surro unding Imām
M ahdī’s Arriv al
‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬: ‫ﻋﻥ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﻗﺎل‬ .52
‫ ﻓﻴﻭﻀﻊ‬, ‫ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺘﺎﺒﻭﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻴﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺤﻴﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺤﻤل‬
‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﺩﻴﻪ ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻨﻅﺭﺕ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻴﻬﻭﺩ ﺃﺴﻠﻤﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‬
.‫ﻤﻨﻬﻡ‬
“ Related by Sulaymān ibn ‘Ī sā ('(*+ - .‫ ا‬01‫)ر‬: I wa s
informe d that the Ark of the Covenant will eme r ge from
T a bar iyyah Sea thro ugh the efforts of Imām Mah dī. It will
be p lac e d befor e him at the Sa cre d Ho use. When the Je ws
will se e this (Ark) , a ll of them except a f e w will em bra ce
I slam. ”1

‫ ﻴﻁﻠﻊ ﻨﺠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻜﻌﺏ‬ .53


. ‫ ﻝﻪ ﺫﻨﺏ ﻴﻀﺊ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Ka‘ b ( ) h a s nar rate d: A comet with a br ight tail will
app ear from th e e a st befor e the appe aran ce of Imām
M ah dī. ”2

‫ ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻨﻜﺴﻑ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺸﺭﻴﻙ‬ .54


. ‫ﺍﻝﻘﻤﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺸﻬﺭ ﺭﻤﻀﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ‬
“ Sha rīk ( ) ha s re late d: I wa s inform e d that befor e the
app ear ance of M ah dī there will be lun ar ec lipse t wic e in
the month of Rama dān.”1

1. Ibn Hammad transmitted it in al-Fitan (1:360#1050); and Suyūtī


copied it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:83).
2. Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:82); and Ibn
Hammād in al-Fitan (1:229#642).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 55

‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .55


‫ ﻓﻌﻨﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬, ‫ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ‬:‫ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬
. ‫ ﻭﻴﺸﺭﺒﻭﻥ ﺤﺒﻪ ﻭﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻬﻡ ﺫﻜﺭ ﻏﻴﺭﻩ‬, ‫ﺃﻓﻭﺍﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬
“ ‘Alī ( ) said: when the anno unce r will anno un ce that
the tr uth is in the fam ily of M uh amma d (A) , at that t ime
ev eryone will be talk in g a bo ut M ah dī’ s a rriv al an d his
love will be f e d into them ( in such a mann er) that they
will ta lk of nothin g e lse but h im.”2

‫ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻓﻲ‬, ‫ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﻠﺩ‬ .56
‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺍﻵﺨﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﻁ ﻴﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺫﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﻑ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﺘﺄﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﻓﺔ ﺨﻴﺭ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬, ‫ﺘ ﺴﺘﺤل ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﺭﻡ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ‬
.‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻫﻨﻴﺎ‬
“ Abū Jala d ( ) n arrate s: a disr uption will ar ise wh ich
will be fo llo we d by anothe r disr uption. T he fir st will be
r elate d to the se con d disr uption a s the lac e is jo ine d to its
wh ip (me anin g they will be c lo se ly r elate d, either the
se con d will imm e diate ly fo llo w the fir st o r their content
will be similar ). T hen ther e will be the ( disr uption of)
swor ds. It will be fo llo we d by another disr uption in wh ich
a ll for bidden th in gs will be dec lar e d pe rmissible . T hen the
c aliphate will come a bo ut, thro ugh the be st per son
amon gst the peop le. If will come a bo ut wh ilst he is sittin g
at hom e.”3

1. Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:82); and Ibn


Hammād in al-Fitan (1:229#642).
2. Suyūtī transmitted it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:68); and Ibn
Hammād in al-Fitan (1:334#965).
3. Ibn Abī Shaybah narrated it in al-Musannaf (7:531#37754); and
Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:65).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
56 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ ﻴﺤﺞ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻤﺭﻭ ﺭﻀﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬ .57


‫ ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎﻫﻡ ﻨﺯﻭل ﺒﻤﻨﻰ ﺇﺫ‬,‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﻓﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺘﻠﻭﺍ ﺤﺘﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﺜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺒﺎﺌل ﺒﻌﻀﻬ ﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺒﻌﺽ‬,‫ﺃﺨﺫﻫﻡ ﻜﺎﻝﻜﻠﺏ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻔﺯﻋﻭﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺨﻴﺭﻫﻡ ﻓﻴﺄﺘﻭﻨﻪ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻠﺼﻕ‬,‫ﺘﺴﻴل ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺩﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻠﻡ‬: ‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭﻝﻭﻥ‬, ‫ ﻴﺒﻜﻲ ﻜﺄﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﻤﻭﻋﻪ‬, ‫ﻭﺠﻬﻪ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ ﻭﻜﻡ ﺩﻡ ﻗﺩ‬,‫ ﻭﻴﺤﻜﻡ ﻜﻡ ﻋﻬﺩ ﻗﺩ ﻨﻘﻀﺘﻤﻭﻩ‬:‫ ﻓﻴﻘﻭل‬,‫ﻓﻠﻨﺒﺎﻴﻌﻙ‬
‫ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻰ‬,‫ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺭﻜﺘﻤﻭﻩ ﻓﺒﺎﻴﻌﻭﻩ‬,‫ﺴﻔﻜﺘﻤﻭﻩ! ﻓﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻜﺭﻫﺎ‬
. ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬
“ ‘Abdullāh ibn ‘Amr ( ) n arrate s: peop le will pe rform
the p ilgr ima ge together an d will gather at ‘Ar afāt without
the Im ām. So at M inā dur in g the ir de sc ent a r evolt will
po unc e upon the m like a do g ( due to wh ich) th e tribe s will
po unc e on on e another . T hey will k ill one another until
the v alley be gin s to flo w with in bloo d. (In this worr ie d
st ate) they will go to the be st p er son a mon gst them to seek
h is ref uge while he will be cry in g with h is fa ce to uch in g
the ka‘bah a s (the narr ator say s) I am lookin g at h is te ar s.
So th ey will re quest h im: plea se come! We want to take an
oath of loya lty on yo ur han d. He will say: it is very sa d
that yo u have broken so m any promises an d hav e she d so
m uch bloo d. So, un willin gly, he will a cc ept their o ath. So
wh en yo u fin d th at per son, yo u sho uld t ake the oath on his
han d bec a use he will be Mah dī on e arth a s we ll a s Mah dī
in the he aven s. ”1

1. Hākim narrated it in al-Mustadrak (4:503,504#8537); Ibn


Hammād, al-Fitan (1:227, 341, 342 # 632, 987); Dānī, as-Sunan-
ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1044, 1045 # 560); and Suyūtī in al-Hāwī
lil-fatāwā (2:76).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 57

Secti on 12
Imam Mahdī (D ) as the Last Caliph
‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .58
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺘﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻡ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﻜﻼﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻝﻡ‬
. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬:‫ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻭل؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻓ ﻘﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ‬,‫ﺃﻓﻬﻤﻪ‬
“ It is narr ate d by Jā bir ibn Sam urah ( ) : I h ear d the
M essen ger o f Allāh (A) say : I slam will rema in
e sta blishe d until t we lve ca liph s h ave r ule d over yo u. T he
Ummah will be un ite d on all of them .
“ T hen I hear d the Prophet (A) say (som ethin g)
wh ich I co uld not un der stan d. I a ske d my f ather: wh at is
he sayin g? He told m e that he h a d sa id: a ll (the t we lve
c aliph s) will be from the Qur ay sh.”1

‫ ﺴﻤﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .59


‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ‬: ‫ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
‫ ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل ﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬,‫ ﻓﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ ﻭﻀﺠﻭﺍ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬.‫ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
. ‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬: ‫ ﻴﺎ ﺃﺒﺔ! ﻤﺎ ﻗﺎل؟ ﻗﺎل‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ ﻷﺒﻲ‬,‫ﺨﻔﻴﺔ‬
“ Jā bir ibn Sam urah ( ) ha s na rrate d that he he ar d the
M essen ger o f Allāh (A) say : I slam will rem ain do minant
until t welv e ca liph s hav e p a sse d.” Jā bir ( ) sa id: ( at this)
peop le sa id ( lo udly:) “ Allāh is the greate st” an d it bec ame

1. Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:86 (#4279);


‘Asqalānī, Fath-ul-bārī (13:212); and Bayhaqī in Dalā’il-un-
nubuwwah (6:520).
Ahmad bin Hambal transmitted it with different words in al-
Musnad (5:93, 92, 98).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
58 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

no isy a ll aro un d. T hen the Prophet (A) sa id so methin g


quietly. I a ske d my father : O father! What did h e say?
(My f ather told me :) he said, “ All those (t welv e ca liph s)
will be from the Qur ay sh.”1
Im am Suy ūtī comments on Abū Dā wūd’ s
na rration in a l-Hā wī lil-fa tā wā (2 :85) :

‫ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬,‫ﻋﻘﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺩﺍﺅﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺴﻨﻨﻪ ﺒﺎﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬


‫ ﻋﻥ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ﺼﺩﺭﻩ ﺤﺩﻴﺙ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﺴﻤﺭﺓ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ‬:‫ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
:‫ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺭﻭﺍﻴﺔ‬.‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺘﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‬
.‫ﻗﺭﻴﺵ‬
‫ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻻﺜﻨﻰ‬:‫ﻓﺄﺸﺎﺭ ﺒﺫﻝﻙ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ‬
.‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬
“ Abū Dā wūd ha s devote d a chapter to Imām
M ah dī in his book a s-Sunan (4 :86). In the
be ginnin g of the ch apter a nar ration of Jā bir ibn
Sa m ur ah ( ) is given . T he M essen ger of Allāh
(A) said: “ unt il t welv e ca liphs h ave p asse d, on
who m th is Ummah will un ite. ” Ac cor din g to
another tra dition, “ this dīn will r ema in do minant
till the t welv e ca liphs h ave p asse d an d all of them
will be from the Qur ay sh.”

1. Abū Dāwūd narrated it in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:86 (#4280,


4281); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (5:93, 97, 98, 101); and
‘Asqalānī in Fath-ul-bārī (13:211).
Muslim related it with some different words in as-Sahīh, b. of
imārah (emritage) 3:1453 (#7/1821).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 59

“ In this ch apter Abū Dā wūd ha s r eferr e d to the


op inion of scho la rs who be lieve that Imām Mah dī
is one of those t we lve caliph s.”
T he conc lusion Suy ūtī ha s dra wn from this is that
Im ām Mah dī will be the t we lfth an d la st Im ām on this
e arth.1
Abū Dā wūd, after intro ducin g the chapter with the se
t wo tra dition s, h as in clude d the fo llo win g narr ation:

‫ ﺴﻤ ﻌﺕ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎﻝﺕ‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺴﻠﻤﺔ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬


. ‫ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬:‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻴﻘﻭل‬
“ Nar rate d by Umm Salamah ('*+ - . ‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬that she
he ar d the M e ssen ger of Allāh (A) say in g: M ah dī will be
from my fa mily an d from the children of Fātim ah.”2
Befo re it he ha s de scribe d the tra dition which say s that
ev en if on ly one day r ema ins in the arr iva l of the Day of
Judgment, Allāh will sen d a per son (na me d Mah dī) from
the Prophet’ s f amily who will f ill the earth with justice
an d fa irne ss just a s it was forme rly fille d with tyranny an d
a ffect ion.

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .59


‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻨﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻁﺎﺅﻩ ﻫﻨﻴﺌﺎ‬, ‫ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻥ ﺭﺠل ﻴﻘﺎل ﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬
“ Abū Sa ‘īd ( ) ha s narr ate d that the Prophet (A)
sa id: In the last day s when so many disr uption s will
app ear , at that tim e ther e will be a per son ca lle d Mah dī.
His contr ibution s will be (ve ry) p lea sant. ”3

1. Suyūtī, al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:85).


2. Related by Abū Dāwūd in as-Sunan, b. of Mahdī, 4:88 (#4284).
Ibn Hammād transmitted it in as-Sunan-ul-wāridah fil-fitan
(5:1057, 1061 # 575, 581).
Dhahabī graded it marfū‘ (traceable) in Mīzān-ul -i‘tidāl fi
naqd-ir-rijāl (3:126).
3. Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:63).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
60 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ )ﺇﺫﺍ ( ﺍﻝﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻔﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻘﺘﺎل‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻫﺭﻱ‬ .60


‫ ﺃﻻ! ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺎﺀ ﺍﷲ ﺃﺼﺤﺎﺏ‬:‫ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻴﺴﻤﻊ ﺼﻭﺕ ﻤ ﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬
. ‫ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬,‫ﻓﻼﻥ‬
‫ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻜﻔﺎ ﻤﻥ‬:‫ﻭﻗﺎﻝﺕ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺒﻨﺕ ﻋﻤﻴﺱ‬
. ‫ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻤﺩﻻﺓ ﻴﻨﻅﺭ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﺎ ﺱ‬
“ Z uhrī ha s na rrate d: when Sufyān’ s (a rmy) an d
M ah dī’ s army will f ac e e ach other fo r battle, on th at day a
vo ice will be h ear d fro m the sky: ‘ be ware! Sure ly, the
fr ien ds of (Imā m) M ah dī are the fr ien ds of Allāh .’
“ An d Asmā’ bint ‘Um ay s sa id: the sign of that day
will be that a han d will be se en h an gin g f rom the sky
wh ich (a ll) the peop le will see .”1

‫ ﻴﺎ ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ! ﺃﻤﻨﺎ‬:‫ ﻗﻠﺕ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .61


‫ ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ‬,‫ ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‬, ‫ ﻻ‬:‫ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺃﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻏﻴﺭﻨﺎ؟ ﻓﻘﺎل‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﻨﻘﺫﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻘﺫﻭﺍ ﻤﻥ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻝﻑ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻨﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﻝﻑ‬,‫ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ‬
‫ ﻭﺒﻨﺎ ﻴﺼﺒﺤﻭ ﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻨﺔ‬,‫ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﻠﻭﺒﻬﻡ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ‬
. ‫ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻜﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﺒﺤﻭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﺩﺍﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻙ ﺇﺨﻭﺍﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﻬﻡ‬
Narr ated by ‘ Alī ( ) , he sa id: I sa id (to the Prophet
( A)) : O M e ssen ger of Allāh (357 ‫ و‬9; 5- .‫= ا‬5?)! W ill
M ah dī be from us, the fam ily of M uh amma d or from
other s? He said: no, but h e will be from amon g us, Allāh
will re-e sta blish I slam thro ugh h im as he did so ( in the
be ginnin g) thro ugh us, an d the se peop le will be re sc ue d
from mischie f thro ugh us ( Mah dī) as th ey h ave been save d
from polythe ism . An d thro ugh o ur mean s (Mah dī) Allāh
will cr eate lov e in their he arts a fter the hatr e d of m ischief

1. Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:76).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 61

a s He cr eate d lov e in their h eart s after the hatre d of


po lytheism. An d thro ugh o ur me ans peop le will be come
brother ly amon gst e ach othe r after th e r iva lry of t urmo ils
a s they have done so in I slam after the riv alry of
po lytheism." 1

‫ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﺭﻁﺎﺓ‬ .62


,‫ ﻴﻐﺯﻭ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻗﻴﺼﺭ‬,‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ ﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺤﺴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺭﺓ‬
‫ ﺜﻡ‬,‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺔ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺠﺎل ﻭﻴﻨﺯل ﻓﻲ ﺯﻤﺎﻨﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‬
“ Artāh h as narr ate d that a pe rson (Mah dī) will appe ar
from the Proph et’s fam ily who will fight in the c ity of
Rome an d h e will be the la st le a der (Imām ) of
M uh amma d’ s Umm ah. Da jjāl will appe ar in his t ime an d
in his tim e a lso ‘Ī sā (D) will de scen d (from the
he aven) .”2
“ Imam Suy ūtī in a l-Hā wī lil-fa tā wā (2 :80) after
listin g the sign s of th e arr ival of Imām Mah dī,
comm ents:

‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻵﺜﺎﺭ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻝﺨﺼﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ "ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻥ" ﻝﻨﻌﻴﻡ ﺒﻥ‬


.‫ ﻭﺃﺤﺩ ﺸﻴﻭﺥ ﺍﻝﺒﺨﺎﺭﻱ‬,‫ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬,‫ﺤﻤﺎﺩ‬
“ All these signs wh ich I have summar ise d
from the book “ al-F itan ” by Nu‘ aym ibn Hammā d
who wa s a hāfiz (of hadīth) an d on e of th e tea cher s
of Imām Bukh ārī.”

1. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:61); Tabarānī, al-


Mu‘jam-ul-awsat (1:136 # 157); Ibn Hammād, al-Fitan (1:370,
371 # 1089, 1090); and Haythamī in Majma‘-uz -zawā’id (7:316,
317).
2. Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:402,408#1214,1234); and
Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:80).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
62 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬:‫ ﻗﺎل‬,‫ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ‬ .63


‫ ﻻ‬, ‫ ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺜﺎ‬: ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬
“ Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ('(*+- .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬narr ates that the
Prophet (A) said: In my Ummah, soon, there will be a
c aliph who will distribute goo ds gen ero usly without
ke epin g a r ecor d of who ha s r ece ive d what. ”1

‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ ﺼﻠﻰ ﺍﷲ‬, ‫ ﻋﻥ ﺠﺎﺒﺭ ﺒﻥ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﷲ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﻤﺎ‬.64


‫ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ ﻻ‬: ‫ ﻗﺎل‬, ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
.‫ﻴﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﺩﺍ‬
. ‫ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ! ﻝﻴﻌﻭﺩﻥ‬:‫ﺜﻡ ﻗﺎل‬
“ Nar rate d by Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh ('(*+- .‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬that
the M essen ger of Allāh ( A) sa id: T here will be a caliph
in my Um mah who will genero usly distribute wealth
witho ut k eep in g a r ecor d of it. An d I swe ar by the One
who controls my life! Certa inly that the dom inan ce (of
I slam) will r eturn (that is, I slam will r ecapt ure its lost
glory an d retrieve its stat us dur in g his re ign).”2

1. Related by Suyūtī in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:60, 61).


2. Hākim graded it sahīh (sound) according to the conditions o f
Muslim in al-Mustadrak (4:454 # 8400), while Dhahabī kept quiet
about it.
Haythamī said in Majma‘-uz-zawā’id (7:316) that B azzār had
related it, and its men are those of (sahīh) sound hadīth.
Ibn Hammād narrated it in al-Fitan (1:362 # 1055); Suyūtī,
ad-Durr-ul-manthūr fit-tafsīr bil-ma’thūr (6:56); and B ayhaqī in
Dalā’il-un-nubuwwah (6:330,331).
Muslim related it with di fferent words in as-Sahīh, b. of fitan
wa ashrāt-us-sā‘ah (turmoils and conditions of the Last Hour)
4:2234 (#67/2913); Ahmad bin Hambal, al-Musnad (3:317); Hindī,
Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:263 # 38659); and Ibn Kathīr in al-Bidāyah
wan-nihāyah (4:599; 10:44).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
T h e Aw ait ed Imām Mahdī (D ) 63

‫ ﻗﺎل ﺭﺴﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺼﻠﻰ‬:‫ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺭﻀﻲ ﺍﷲ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻗﺎل‬.65


‫ ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻝﻴﻠﺔ ﻝ ﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠ ﻙ‬:‫ﺍﷲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺁﻝﻪ ﻭﺴﻠﻡ‬
‫ ﻭﺍﺴﻡ‬, ‫ ﻴﻭﺍﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‬, ‫ﺍﻝﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ‬
‫ ﻭ‬, ‫ ﻴﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻁﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻻ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻤﻠﺌﺕ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﺭﺍ‬,‫ﺃﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﺴﻡ ﺃﺒﻲ‬
,‫ ﻭﻴﺠﻌل ﺍﷲ ﺍﻝﻐﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ‬,‫ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻭﻴﺔ‬
. ‫ ﺜﻡ ﻻ ﺨﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻴﺵ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‬, ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﺙ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﻌﺎ‬
“ Nar rate d by ‘Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd ('(*+ - . ‫ ا‬01‫ )ر‬that
M essen ger o f Allāh (A) sa id: if th ere wa s on ly on e night
left for this world to stay in ta ct, Allāh will len gthen it
until a mem ber of my fam ily becom es the r uler who se
nam e will be the same as my n ame an d the nam e of his
f ather will be the sam e a s the nam e of my f ather. He will
f ill the world with justic e an d f airne ss just a s it wa s f ille d
with tyranny an d explo itation. He will distribute thin gs
e qually amon g the people an d Allāh will also fill the ir
he arts with content. He will r ule for sev en or nin e ye ar s.
T hen a fter the ca liph ate of Mah dī, ther e will be a total en d
to goo dne ss ( an d virtue ).”1

1
. Suyūtī narrated it in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:64); Tabarānī, al-
Mu‘jam-ul-kabīr (10:133, 135 # 10216, 10224); Dānī, as-Sunan-
ul-wāridah fil-fitan (5:1055 # 572); Haythamī, Mawārid-uz-
zam’ān (6:129 # 1877); and Hindī in Kanz-ul-‘ummāl (14:269 #
38683).
Haythamī also narrated it through Abū Hu ray arah (rt a) in
Mawārid-uz-zam’ān (6:128 # 1876).
Suyūtī narrated it with a di fference of words at another place
in al-Hāwī lil-fatāwā (2:58).

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\05-


Awaited Imam-02 (37-63).doc
Glossary

: rad iya llāhu ‘anhu — Allāh be plea se d with h im: use d


a fter the na me of Comp anion of the Prophet ( A).
#$ %' (‫* ا‬+‫ر‬: radiyallāhu ‘anhā — Allāh be p lea se d with
he r: use d a fter the n ame of a f ema le Comp anion of the
Prophet ( A).
-$ %' (‫* ا‬+‫ ر‬: rad iya llāhu ‘anhum — Allāh be ple a se d
with all of them : use d after the nam es of mor e than t wo
ma le Co mpanion s o f the Prophet ( A).
#/$%' (‫* ا‬+‫ ر‬: radiya llāhu ‘anhumā — Allāh is ple a se d
with both of them; use d after the name s of t wo
Compan ion s of the Proph et (A), irre sp ectiv e of the ir
gen der.
D: ‘ala yh-is- sa lām — ( May Allāh sho wer His) pea ce on
h im: use d a fter the n ame of Allāh’ s m e ssen ger , prophet
an d an ge l.
‫م‬124‫ ا‬#/$ 57': ‘ala yhim-a s- salām — (M ay Allāh sho wer
His) p ea ce on both of them: use d after the n ame s of t wo
me ssen ger s, proph ets an d an gels.
A: sallallāhu ‘alayh i wa ālihī wa sa llam — Allāh ble ss
an d sen d pea ce on h im an d h is ch ildren : use d afte r the
nam e of the La st M essen ger of Allāh ( A).
abdāl: pl. of badal. lit. Substit ute s. A per son by whom
Allāh contin ue s the wor ld in existenc e as mention e d in the
tra dition s. T heir n um ber is seventy, of whom fo rty liv e in
Sy ria an d thirty e lse wh ere. Wh en one die s another take s
h is place , be in g appo inte d by Allāh .
65
66 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

athar: p l. ā thā r. lit. re latin g. Gener ally use d for a


na rration r elate d from one of the Compan ions, rather than
from the Prophet ( A), which is kno wn a s hadīth.
cali ph ate : khilāfah . T his is the po litica l sy stem of I slam,
it s h ea d the ca liph /kha līfah is the succ e ssor of the Prophet
( A) in this r e gar d.
dīn: it is an Ar a bic wor d use d for I slam. It is mo re
spe cif ic ia lly use d for the re ligion an d rev ea le d book s of
the prophets an d the me ssen ger s. It is a comp rehen sive
term cove rin g not only re ligio us pr actice s an d r ituals but
a lso app lie s to all a sp ects of lif e an d prov ide s guidan ce
for it. While madhab (re ligion) is r e stricte d to man’ s
spirit ua l life an d dea ls with its r elation ship with Go d
a lone .
din ar: an an cient go ld coin.
fajr: da wn or e arly morn in g be fore sunr ise ; morn in g
pr ayer.
ghawth: lit. on e to whom we can cry for h elp . A
me diator ; a title given to a sa int of the h ighe st or der .
h adīth : p l. ahādīth. lit. tra dition. T he say in gs, pr actice
an d approv e d tra dit ions of the Prophet M uh amma d (A) .
h āfiz : lit. a guar dian or protector. (1) on e o f the name s of
Go d, a l-Hāfiz. (2) a governor , guar dian of the M akkan
temp le. (3) one who ha s memo riz e d the whole of the
Qur’ān. (4) one who h a s memo rize d on e h un dr e d tho usan d
tra dition s.
h asan: a hadīth, na rrate d by a re lia ble ch ain of n arr ators
tho ugh not r each in g the gr a de o f sahīh ( so un d) hadīth, but
r ecor ds a comp lete cha in of nar rators up to the Prophet
( A).
Imām: (1) on e who lea ds p eople in pr ayer s; (2) an
em inent I slam ic scho la r; (3 ) spir itual lea der of the
M uslim s. T her e will be tota l of t welv e such Im ām s, the
f ir st bein g Imām ‘Alī (D) an d the la st Imām Mah dī (D ).
Gl o s s ar y 67

iqāmah : a ca ll sim ilar to the adhān (the c all to p raye r),


sa id imme diately befor e a con gr e gationa l pr ayer .
‘Īsā (D): nam e o f Allah’ s pen ultimate m essen ger, Je sus.
He will come do wn from the he aven s durin g the time of
Im ām M ah dī (D).
ka‘bah: a c ube- shap e d buildin g at the centre of a l-
M asjid- ul- Har ām (the gre at mo sque at M akkah) to war ds
wh ich a ll M uslims fa ce in pray er. It is a lso kno wn a s the
Ho use of Allah.
maqām Ibrāh īm: th e stone at Makkah with in the
bo un da ry of al- Ma sjid- ul-Harām , wh ich ha s the
impre ssion of the footprint s of th e Prophet I brāh īm ( D).
T his is the stone on which I br āhīm (D) stood wh ile he
an d h is son, the Prophet Ismā‘ īl ( D), were buildin g the
ka ‘bah.
Maryam: the mother of p rophet ‘Ī sā ; M ary.
sah īh: so un d. A had īth with an un brok en chain of
na rrator s ran gin g f rom the Prophet M uh amma d (A) an d
app roach in g an er a thro ugh re lia ble narr ators without
be in g shādh (o dd) or mu‘alla l (f a ulty) in bet ween the t wo
c ross relater s.
sh arī‘ah : lit. roa d. It is a le ga l sy stem of a nation ba se d
on the rev elation of their p rophet/m essen ger. T he last
sha rī‘ah is that of I slam that r eplace s a ll pr evio us
sha rī‘ah s.
s pi ritual leade rshi p: imāmah. T his status will be he ld
by t we lve Imām s, the f ir st of wh ich was ‘Alī al- M urta dā
(D ), an d the la st Imām Mah dī (D) .
s pi ritual sove reignty: wilā yah; sainthoo d. A spe cia l
spirit ua l stat us wh ich ra ise s the per son a bove that of
norm al peop le. T her e are var io us leve ls an d gra des of
wilāyah such a s gha wth, qu tb, etc.
su nnah : pl. sunan. lit. the path, way o r a form, the
c ustomary pra ctic e of a p er son or a gro up of peop le. It ha s
68 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

com e to ref er almo st ex clusive ly to the le ga l way o r way s,


or ders, statement s an d act s of wor sh ip, etc., o f the Prophet
M uh amma d (A) wh ich hav e become th e mo dels to be
fo llo we d by M uslim s.
tābi‘ī: so meone who h as met a Comp anion o f the Ho ly
Prophet ( A) in the state of īmān (fa ith) an d die d as a
be liever .
Bibliography

The Holy Qu r’ān .


‘ Abd- ur- Ra zzā q, Abū Bakr, San‘ān ī (126-211/744 -826),
a l-Mu sanna f, Kar ach i, Pak istan: a l-Ma jlis- ul-‘ilm ī, 1 st
e d. 1390/1970 .
Abū ‘Awānah , Ya ‘ qūb ibn Ish ā q ibn I brāh īm ibn Zay d
(230-316 /845-928), al- Mu snad, Be ir ut, Le banon: 1 st
e d. 1998.
Abū Dā wūd, Sulaym ān ibn Ash‘ ath ibn I shā q ibn Bash īr
Sijistān ī (202-275 /817-889), as-Sunan, Be ir ut,
L e banon : Dār- ul-Fikr, 1414 /1994.
Abū Nu‘aym , Ahm a d ibn ‘ Abdullāh Asbahān ī (336-
430 /948-1038), Hilyat-ul-a wliyā’ wa tabaqāt-u l-
a sfiyā’ , Beir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-k itā b-il-‘ ara bī, 3 rd e d.
1400 /1980.
Abū Ya‘ lā, Ahm a d ibn ‘Alī (210-307 /825-919) , a l-
Musnad , Dama sc us, Syr ia : Dā r- ul-ma’m ūn lit-t urāth,
1 s t e d. 1404/1984 .
Ah ma d ibn Ham bal, I bn M uh amma d (164-241/780 -855),
a l-Mu snad, Beir ut, L e banon : a l-Makta b- ul-I slām ī, 2 nd
e d. 1398/1978 .
‘ Ajla wnī, Abū a l-Fidā’ I smā‘ īl ibn M uham ma d ibn ‘ Abd-
ul-Hā dī (1087-1162/1676-1749 ), Ka shf-u l- khifā’ wa
muzīl-ul- ilbā s, Beir ut, L e banon : M u’ assisat- ur-r isālah,
4 th e d. 1405/1985.
Albān ī, M uhamm a d Nā sir- ud-Dīn (1333-1420/1914 -1999),
S ilsila t-ul-ahād īth-is- sah īhah, Be ir ut, Le banon : a l-
M akta b- ul- Islām ī, 4 th e d. 1405 /1985.

69
70 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

‘ Asqalānī, I bn Hajar Ahm a d ibn ‘ Alī (773-852 /1372-


1449), Fa th-ul-bārī, Lahor e, Pak istan: Dār n ash r-il-
k ut ub-il-I slāmiyy ah, 1401 /1981.
l al-I sābah fī tamyīz-is- sahābah, Beir ut, Le banon :
Dār- ul-jīl, 1 s t e d. 1412/1992 .
l a l- Matā lib-ul- ‘āliyah, M akkah, Sa udi Ar a bia :
‘ Abbā s Ah ma d al- Bā z, n . d.
Az dī, Ma‘m ar ibn Rā shid (95-153 /713-770) , a l- Jāmi‘,
Be ir ut, L e banon : a l-M aktab- ul- Islam i, 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .
Baghawī, Abū Muhammad Husayn ibn Mas‘ūd (436-516/1044-
1122), Sha rh-u s- sunnah, Beirut, Lebanon: al-Maktab-ul-
Islāmī, 2 nd ed. 1403/1983.
Bayh a qī, Ahma d ibn Husayn (384-458 /994-1066), Dalā’il-
un-nubuwwah, Beirut, Lebanon: Dār-ul-kutub-il-‘ilmiyyah,
1 st ed. 1405/1985.
l a s-Sunan-ul-kub rā, M ultan, Pak istan: Na shr- us-
sunnah, n. d.
Ba zzā r, Abū Bakr Ahma d ibn ‘Am r (210-292/825 -905),
a l-Mu snad, Beir ut, Le banon: 1 st e d. 1409 AH .
Bukhārī, Muhammad ibn Ismā‘īl (194-256/810-870), as-Sahīh,
Damascus, Syria: Dār-ul-qalam, 1 st ed. 1401/1981.
Dānī, Abū ‘ Amr ‘Uthmān ibn Sa‘īd ibn ‘ Uthmān ibn Sa‘ īd
ibn ‘Um ar M uqrī (371-444/981 -1052), a s-Sunan-u l-
wā ridah fil-fitan , Riya dh, Sa udi Ara b: Dā r- ul- ‘ā sim ah,
1 s t e d. 1416.
Daylamī, Abū Sh ujā‘ Shīr a wayh (445-509 /1053-1115) , a l-
F irdaws, Beir ut, L e banon : Dā r- ul-k ut ub- il- ‘ilmiyy ah,
1 s t e d. 1986.
Dh aha bī, M uhamm a d ibn Ahm a d ibn ‘Uthmān (673-
748 /1274-1348), Mīzān-u l-i‘ tidāl fī naqd-ir- rijā l,
Be ir ut, Le banon : Dār- ul-k utub- il-‘ilm iyyah, 1 s t e d.
1995.
Hākim , Abū ‘Abdullāh M uhamm a d ibn ‘Abdullāh (321-
405 /933-1014), a l- Mustad rak, Beir ut, L e banon : Dār-
ul-k utub- il-‘ilm iyyah, 1 st e d. 1411 /1990.
l al- Mu stad ra k, Makk ah, Sa udi Ar a bia: Dār- ul- bā z,
n. d.
Bib lio gr aphy 71

Haythamī, ‘Alī ibn Abū Bakr (735-807/1335 -1405),


Majma‘-u z- za wā’id , Cairo, E gypt: Dār - ur-r iyān lit-
t urāth, 1407 /1987.
l Mawā rid-u z- zam’ān, Beir ut, Le banon : Dār- ul-
k ut ub-il-‘ ilm iyyah , n. d.
Hin dī, ‘ Alā’- ud- Dīn ‘Alī a l-M uttaqī ( d.975 AH ), Kan z-u l-
‘ummāl, Be ir ut, Le banon : M u’a ssisat- ur -risā lah , 2 nd
e d. 1407/1986 .
I bn Abī Sh ay bah, Abū Bak r ‘Abdullāh ibn M uh amma d
(159-235 /776-850), al- Mu sannaf, Riya dh , Sa udi Ara b:
M akta bat- ur-r ush d, 1 st e d. 1409 AH .
I bn ‘Asākir , Abū al-Qā sim ‘Alī ibn Ha san (499-571 /1105-
1176), Tā rikh Dimashq a l-kab īr, gener ally kno wn a s
Tārīkh Ibn ‘A sākīr, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār ihyā ’-it-
t urāth a l-‘ ara bī, 1 s t e d. 1421 /2001.
I bn Hamm ā d, Abū ‘Abdullāh Nu‘ aym ( d. 229 /884), a l-
F itan , Ca iro, E gypt : M aktabat- ut-ta whīd, 1 st e d. 1412.
I bn Hibbān , M uh amma d (270-354 /884-965) , a s-Sah īh,
Be ir ut, Le banon : M u’ assisat- ur-r isālah, 2 nd e d.
1414 /1993.
I bn Jār ūd, Abū M uh amma d ‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Alī ( d. 307 /
919), a l-Mun taqā, Be ir ut, L e banon : M u’a ssisat-ul-
k itāb ath-tha qāf iyyah , 1 st e d. 1408/1988.
I bn Kathīr , Abū al- Fidā’ I smā ‘īl ibn ‘Uma r (701-
774 /1301-1373), al-Bidā yah wan-n ihāyah , Be ir ut,
L e banon : Dār- ul-fik r, 1419 /1998.
l Ta fsīr-u l-Qu r’ān a l-‘a zīm, Be ir ut, Le banon: Dār- ul-
ma ‘rif ah, 1400 /1980.
I bn M ājah, Abū ‘Abdullah M uhamm a d ibn Yazīd Qaz wīn ī
(209-273 /824-887), Sunan, Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-
k ut ub-il-‘ ilm iyyah , 1 st e d. 1419/1998.
I bn M un dah, Abū ‘Abdullāh M uh amma d ibn I shā q ibn
Yahyā (310 -395/922-1005 ), al-Īmān, Beir ut, Le banon :
M u’ a ssisat- ur-r isā lah, 2 nd e d. 1406 AH .
Ibn Qayyim, ‘Abū ‘Abdullāh Muhammad al-Jawziyyah (691-
751/1292-1350), al- Manā r-u l-munīf, Ha la b, Sy ria :
M akta b- ul- matbū‘āt-il-I slām ī, 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .
72 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Kh atīb Ba gh dā dī, Abū Bakr Ahm a d ibn ‘Alī, (392-


463 /1002-1071), Tā rīkh Baghdad, Be ir ut, Le banon :
Dār- ul-kitā b-il-‘a ra bī, n. d.
Khatīb T abrīzī, Muhammad ibn ‘Abdullāh, Mishkāt-ul-masābīh,
Beirut, Lebanon: Dār-ul-fikr, 1st ed. 1411/1991.
Kinān ī, ِA hma d ibn Abī Bakr ibn I smā‘ īl (762-840 AH ),
Misbāh-u z- zujā jah, Beir ut, Le banon : 2 nd e d. 1403 AH .
M anā wī, ‘ Abd- ur- Ra wf, Fa yd-u l-qadīr, E gypt: Makta bat-
ut-tujjāriyy ah al-k ubr ā, 1356 AH .
M iz zī, Yūsuf ibn ‘Abd- ur -Rahmān (654-742/1256 -1341),
Tuhfa t-ul-ash rā f b i-ma‘rifa t- il-a trāf, Be ir ut, Le banon :
a l-M akta b- ul-I slā mī, 2 nd e d. 1403/1983 .
Muslim, Ibn-ul-Hajjāj Qushayrī (206-261/821-875), as-Sahīh,
Beirut, Lebanon: Dār Ihyā’-it-turāth-il-‘arabī, n.d.
M uja ddid Alf T hānī, Shaykh Ahm a d Sarhan dī (971-
1034 /1564-1624), Mak tūbāt Imam Rabbānī, Lahor e,
Pak istan : Nūr Co., n. d.
Qurtubī, Abū ‘Abdullāh, Muhammad ibn Ahmad (284-380/897-
990), al-Jāmi‘ li-ahkām-il-Qur’ān, Cairo, Egypt: Dār-ush-
sha‘b, 2nd ed. 1372 AH .
Ru’yān ī, Abū Bakr M uh amma d ibn Hār ūn ( d. 307 AH ) , a l-
Musnad , Cairo , E gypt: M u’a ssisah Cor do ba, 1 s t e d.
1416 AH .
Sh āh I sma‘ īl Dihla wī, (1193-1246 /1779-1831), S irā t
mustaqīm.
Sh āh Wa lī Allāh M uha ddith Dih la wī (1114-1174 /1703-
1762), Hama‘āt, Hy der a ba d, P akistan: Aca de my Shāh
Wa lī Allāh M uha ddith Dihla wī, n . d.
l at-Ta fhīmāt-u l- ilāh iy yah, Hy dera ba d, Pak istan:
Aca demy Shāh W alī Allāh M uha ddith Dihla wī,
1387 /1967.
Suy ūt ī, Ja lā l- ud-Dīn ‘ Abd- ur- Rahm ān (849-911 /1445-
1505), ad -Du rr-ul-manthūr fit- tafsīr bil-ma’thū r,
Be ir ut, L e banon : Dār- ul-ma‘r if ah, n. d.
l a l-Hā wi lil- fatā wā, Faisala ba d, Pakistan: M akta bah
Nūriyy ah Ridwiyy ah, n. d.
Bib lio gr aphy 73

T a bar ānī, Sulaymān ibn Ahma d (260-360 /873-971), a l-


Mu‘jam-u l-a wsa t, Cairo , E gypt: Dā r- ul-h aram ayn,
1415 AH .
l a l- Mu‘jam-u l-kab īr, Mosul, Ira q: Mat ba‘ at-uz-
z uh rā’- il-ha dīthah , 2 nd e d. 1404 /1983.
l a l- Mu‘ jam-us- saghīr, Beir ut, Le banon: al- Makta b-
ul-I slami, 1 st e d. 1405/1985.
l Mu snad-ush -shāmiyy īn, Beir ut, Le banon : M u’a ssisat
- ur- risā lah , 1 st e d. 1405/1984.
T irm idhī, Abū ‘Ī sā M uh amma d ibn ‘Ī sā (210-279 /825-
892), a l-Jāmi‘-us-sah īh, Be ir ut, Le banon: Dār- ul-
gha r b-il-I slāmī, 2 nd e d. 1998.
‫‪Index to Hadīth and Athar‬‬
‫‪Arabic‬‬

‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻔﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻘﺘﺎل ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺃﺒﺸﺭﻜﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺒﻌﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻨﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺁل ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪43‬‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻻ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻘﺘل ﺍﻝﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻜﻔﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻴﻌﻴﺵ ﺨﻤﺴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺘﺎﺒﻭﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺒﻠﻐﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﻨﻜﺴﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻤﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺘﻨﺔ‪ ,‬ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺠﻭﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻠﻤﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺴﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻜﻡ ﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻫﺩﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪75‬‬
‫‪76‬‬ ‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D‬‬

‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺴ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺜﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺭﻡ ﻴﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻤﺎﺀ ‪.‬‬

‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺼﻼﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺠﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺘﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻨﺯل ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﻓﻴﻜﻡ‪ ,‬ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻜﻡ ﻤﻨﻜﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪44, 60‬‬ ‫ﻻ‪ ,‬ﺒل ﻤﻨﺎ‪ ,‬ﻴﺨﺘﻡ ﺍﷲ ﺒﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺒﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺘﺫﻫﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻤﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺏ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺘﺯﺍل ﻁﺎﺌﻔﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﻸ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻅﻠﻤﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺘﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻡ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻴﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﺠﺄ ﻴﻠﺘﺠﺊ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻅﻠﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪57, 58‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻋﺯﻴﺯﺍ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ ﻋﺸﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻴﺯﺍل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻜﻡ ﺍﺜﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪24, 63,‬‬ ‫ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻝﻴﻠﺔ ﻝﻁﻭل ﺍﷲ ﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ‪ ,‬ﻝﻁﻭ‪‬ل ﺍﷲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝ ﻴﻭﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﻝﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻫﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻴﻭﻡ ﻝﺒﻌﺙ ﺍﷲ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻘﺩ ﻜﻔﺭ‪ ,‬ﻭﻤﻥ ﻜﺫﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\08-‬‬
‫‪Index-Arabic (75-78).doc‬‬
‫)‪Index to Hadīth and Athar (Arabic‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬

‫‪1, 7‬‬ ‫ﻤﻥ ﻜ ﻨﺕ ﻤﻭﻻﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻤﻭﻻﻩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻤﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺼﻠﻲ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ ﺨﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺯل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻭﻝﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﻝﻭﻨﻪ ﻝﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪19, 59‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺕ ﻴﺼﻠﺤﻪ ﺍﷲ ﻓﻲ ﻝﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺕ‪ ,‬ﺃﺸﻡ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺃﺠﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻤﻨﻲ‪ ,‬ﺃﺠﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﻬﺔ ﺃﻗﻨﻰ ﺍﻷﻨﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻨﺤﻥ ﻭ‪ ‬ﹶﻝﺩ ﻋﺒﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﺏ ﺴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫل ﺍﻝﺠﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻨﻌﻡ‪ ,‬ﻫﻭ ﺤﻕ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻨ ﻲ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﻫﻡ ﻴﻭﻤﺌﺫ ﻗﻠﻴل ﻭﺠﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻤﺎﻤﻬﻡ ‪.‬‬

‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﻫﻭ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺘﺭﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﺎﺘل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻨﺘﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺘﻠﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪ ,‬ﺜﻡ ﻋﻘﺩ ﺒﻴﺩﻩ ﺴﺒﻌﺎ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﺎل‪ :‬ﺫﺍﻙ ﻴﺨﺭﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺒﻌﺜﻨﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﻕ! ﺇﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﻴﺒﺎﻴﻊ ﻝﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻜﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻜﻌﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﻴﺤﺞ ﺍﻝ ﻨﺎﺱ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻭﻴﻌﺭﻓﻭﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺇﻤﺎﻡ‪.‬‬


‫‪77‬‬
‫‪78‬‬ ‫) ‪T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D‬‬

‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺩﺠﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺨﻔﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ‪.‬‬

‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ ﻋﻤﺎﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬

‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻭل ﺒﺴﻨﺘﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ,‬ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻴﺴﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﷲ ﺍﻝﻐﻴﺙ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﻴﻁﻠﻊ ﻨﺠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺨﺭﻭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ‪.‬‬

‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﻴﻘﺘﺘل ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜﻨﺯﻜﻡ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ ﺒﻥ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪25, 27‬‬ ‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﻭﺕ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻴﺨﺭﺝ ﺭﺠل‪.‬‬

‫‪59‬‬ ‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻨﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺘﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺨﺭ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل‪.‬‬

‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺘﺴﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪40, 44‬‬ ‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ‪ ,‬ﺇﻥ ﻗﺼﺭ ﻓﺴﺒﻊ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺜﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪35, 39, 62,‬‬ ‫ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻤﺘﻲ ﺨﻠﻴﻔﺔ ﻴﺤﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﺤﺜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﻴﻠﺘﻔﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻬﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻨﺯل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﺭﻴﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻴﻠﻲ ﺭﺠل ﻤﻥ ﺃﻫل ﺒﻴﺘﻲ ﻴﻭﺍﻁ ﺊ ﺍﺴﻤﻪ ﺍﺴﻤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻴﻭﺸﻙ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺤﺴﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜﻨﺯ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻫﺏ ‪.‬‬

‫‪F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final Boo k\08-‬‬


‫‪Index-Arabic (75-78).doc‬‬
Index to Hadīth and Athar
Englis h

A com et with a bright ta il will app ear from 54


the ea st.
A disr uption will ar ise which will be 55
fo llo we d by another disr uption.
A per son will appe ar f rom my f amily who 34
will p rea ch
A per son, Mah dī, will appe ar fro m the 61
Prophet’ s fa mily.
A section of my p eople will not c ea se 47
f ightin g for the T ruth.
A time will com e wh en the intensity of 22
oppr ession.
‘ Alī is yo ur spir it ua l lea de r. 7
At m inim um the dur ation of the ca liph ate of 39
M ah dī.
At the death of a Ca liph there will be a 26
differ enc e of op inion .
Ev en if only one day rem ain s befor e the en d 19
of the wor ld.
He will be from the ch ildren of Fātimah. 16
‘Ī sā (D) will de scen d after Mah dī an d will 50
off er.
I am givin g yo u the goo d n e ws of the com in g 38
of Mah dī.
I swea r by the One who ha s sent me with the 33
T ruth!
I wa s inform e d that befor e the app ear anc e of 54
M ah dī.
I wa s inform e d that the Ark of the Coven ant 54
79
80 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

will emer ge.


If only on e day wa s to rema in for this wor ld 21
to stay in tact.
If there wa s on ly one night left for th is wor ld 24, 63
to stay in tact.
In (the month of) M uh arr am, an anno un cer 52
will ca ll o ut.
In my Umm ah soon there will be a ca liph 62
who will distr ibute.
In the last days when so many disr uption s 59
app ear .
I slam will rem ain dom inant until t we lve 57
c aliph s
I slam will rem ain e stablish e d until t we lve 57
c aliph s.
M ah dī will app ear after the m ur der o f ‘ Naf s 43
Z akiyy ah’.
M ah dī will app ear in the la st day s. 32
M ah dī will be bo rn dur in g the la st day s of 37
my Ummah.
M ah dī will be from m e. 22
M ah dī will be from my children . 16
M ah dī will be from my fam ily. 19
M ah dī will be from my p ro geny. 21, 28,
31, 59
M ah dī will be from this Ummah an d will 51
lea d ‘Ī sā
M ah dī will com e an d there will be a tur ban 53
on h is he a d.
Near to the en d of time, a Caliph (M ah dī) 22, 31
will come.
No , but he will be from amon g us. 60
On e of my ch ildr en will be the ca liph. 18
Peop le exactly e qua l in n um ber to the 25
Compan ion s of Ba dr.
Peop le will perform the pilgr ima ge together. 56
Prophet ‘Ī sā ibn Mary am will de scen d. 49, 50
T hat time is ne ar wh en ne ither dinar s no r 19
F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final
Book\09-Index-Englis h (79-82).doc
Index to Hadīth and Athar (English) 81

gr ain.
T he Ar a bs will be in small n um ber. 49
T he Day of Judgement will not com e until a 35
pe rson .
T he Day of Judgm ent will not come until the 20
e arth is f ille d with tyranny.
T he e arth will be fille d with tyranny an d 22
oppr ession.
T he nam e of Mah dī will be M uha mma d. 17
T he sign o f that day will be that a han d will 60
be seen.
T he time is n ear when the riv er E uph rate s. 30
T he wor ld will not seize to ex ist unt il 18
someon e from my fam ily.
T here will be a c aliph in my Ummah who 35, 39,
will genero usly. 62
T here will be a pe rson from this Ummah an d 50
‘Ī sā
T here will be diff eren ce of opin ion ove r the 27
de ath of the caliph.
T here will be Mah dī in my Um mah. 40, 41,
42, 44
T here will be p ea ce bet ween yo u an d Rom e 16
fo ur time s.
T his dīn will r ema in domin ant till the t welv e 58
c aliph s
T hree p er son s will wa ge wa r ne ar yo ur 29
trea sur e.
Unt il t welv e c aliph s hav e pa sse d on whom 58
this Ummah will unite.
We , the ch ildren of ‘Abd- ul-M uttalib. 15
What will be the state (of yo ur joy) at the 46
tim e wh en ‘Ī sā
When Islam (ie the state of the Umm ah) 48
be come s weak .
When Mah dī will appea r. 50
When Sufy ān’ s (a rmy) an d Mah dī’ s a rmy 60
will fac e e ach other .
82 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

When the anno unc er will anno unc e. 55


Whoev er den ie s (the com in g of) Da jjāl, ha s 52
sure ly committe d disbelief .
Whoev er ha s me as his m aster . 1, 7
Ye s, M ah dī is the T r uth. 50

F:\Books\Boo ks-by-Q I\ENGLISH BOOKS\_Awaited Ima m (Fina l)\Final


Book\09-Index-Englis h (79-82).doc
General Index

abdā l, 25, 26, 28


‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Amr ( ), 50, 56
‘ Abdullāh ibn M a s‘ ūd (%&() + ,‫ ا‬./‫)ر‬, 17, 18, 24, 63
‘ Abdullāh ibn ‘ Umar (%&() + ,‫ ا‬./‫ )ر‬, 53
‘ Abd- ul- M uttalib ( ), 15
Abū ‘Alā’ , 20
Abū Bakr as- Siddīq ( ), 4, 5, 6, 9
Abu a l-Hasan Āburrī, 46
Abū Hur ayrah ( ), 4 , 30, 35 , 39, 40 , 44, 46
Abū Jala d ( ) , 55
Abū Na drah, 19, 20
Abū Sa ‘īd Kh udrī ( ), 20, 21, 22, 23, 31 , 34, 37, 38 , 41,
42, 50, 59
Abū Sālih, 19
Abū T ufay l, 32, 33
Abū Um āmah Bāh ilī ( ), 16 , 49
Ah ma d Sarh an dī, see M uja ddid Alf T hānī
Ah l- us- Sunnah wa l- Jam ā‘ah, 2
‘ Ā’ishah (%()+ ,‫ ا‬./‫ )ر‬, 16
‘ Alī a l-M urta dā ( ), 1, 2, 4 , 5, 6, 7 , 8, 9, 11, 12, 15 , 21,
28, 32, 44, 55, 60
‘ Alī a l- Hilā lī ( ), 33
An a s ibn Mā lik ( ), 4, 15
Artāt, 61
‘ Āsim, 19
Asm ā’ bint ‘Umay s, 60
Ba dr , 32
battle of, 26 , 28, 32
83
84 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Bay dā’, 26 , 28
Black Stone, 25 , 28
Ca liph , 5, 6, 18, 19, 20, 23, 26, 27 , 29 , 31, 32, 33, 35, 37,
39, 43, 53, 57, 58, 59, 62, 63
Ca liph ate, 2 , 5, 6, 7, 18 , 24, 26, 27 , 28, 37, 38, 39 , 40, 43,
55
Compan ion s, 2, 4, 5
con sensus, 5
Dajjā l, 48 , 52, 61
Day of Judgement, 1, 20, 35, 46, 59
Democr acy, 6
E le ction, 5
E uphr ates, 30
Fātim ah (%()+ ,‫ ا‬./‫)ر‬, 11, 15, 16, 19, 33, 59
Fin ality of me ssen ger ship, 4
gen era l inher itance , 2
Gh a dīr Kh um , 1, 6
Gh a wth- ul-A‘ zam, 9
Hamz ah ( ) , 15
Ha ssan ( ) , 11, 15 , 33
Hā shim, 27
Hera clius, 16
Ho ly Ho use ( Bayt- ul-M uqa dda s), 34
Hudh ayfah ( ), 31, 50
Husse in ( ), 11, 15, 33
I bn Jur ayh, 47
Im ām, 5 , 11, 12, 13, 18, 22 , 25, 43, 46, 48, 49 , 54, 56, 58,
59, 60, 61
imāmah, see spir itual Le a der ship
interme diation, 2, 11
iqāmah, 49, 51
Ir a q, 25
‘Ī sā ibn Mary am (‫م‬8 9;‫ ا‬%&(< >+ ), 46 , 47, 48 , 49, 50 , 51
I slamic dom inan ce, 32 , 35, 40 , 45, 57 , 60
Ja‘f ar ( ), 15
Jā bir ibn ‘ Abdullāh (%&() + ,‫ ا‬./‫ )ر‬, 19, 35, 39, 46, 48, 52,
62
General Index 85

Jā bir ibn Sam ur ah ( ), 57, 58


Jurayr ī, 20
ka ‘bah, 33, 56
Kalb, 26, 28 , 54
tribe, 26, 28
kh ilā fah, see ca liph ate
M ah dī (D), 2 , 11, 12 , 13, 15 , 16, 17 , 18, 19 , 20, 21 , 22,
23, 24, 25 , 26, 28, 29, 30 , 31, 32, 33 , 37, 38, 39, 40, 41,
42, 43, 44 , 45, 46, 48, 49 , 50, 51, 52 , 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
59, 60, 61
M akkah, 26, 27, 33
M e din a, 1, 26, 27
M inā, 56
M uh amma d ibn Hana fiyy ah, 32, 33
M ujāh id, 43
M uja ddid Alf T hān ī, 10
M usta wrid ibn Khay lān, 16
muta watir, 6
Naf s Z akiyy ah, 43
po litica l inh eritan ce, 2, 4
Quray sh, 26 , 57, 58
Quray shī, 26
Ram a dān, 54
Rome , 16
Sa ‘ īd ibn M usayy a b, 15
Sh āh W alī Allāh M uh a ddith Dih la wī, 3, 7, 12
Sh āh I sm ā‘īl Dih la wī, 9
Sh ahr ibn Ha wsh a b ( ) , 52
spirit ua l inh eritan ce, 2, 4
spirit ua l lea dersh ip, 5, 6, 8
spirit ua l sover eignty, 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13
St ation of I brāh īm, 25, 26, 28
Suf yān ī, 26, 28
Suf yān’ s (army) , 26, 60
Sula ymān ibn ‘Ī sā (%&()+ ,‫ ا‬./‫ )ر‬, 54
Sula ymān ibn Ha bīb, 16
Suc c e ssor s, 2
86 T he Aw ait ed Imā m Mahdī (D )

Sy ria, 19, 25, 28


T ālūt, 33
tasa wwu f, 11
T ha wbān ( ), 29
‘ Umar Fā r uq ( ) , 5, 9
‘ Umar ibn ‘ Abd- ul-‘Azīz, 20
Umm Salamah (%()+ ,‫ ا‬./‫)ر‬, 15 , 16, 19 , 25, 26 , 27, 59
Umm Sh ar īk bint ‘ Abī al-‘Ak ar (%() + ,‫ ا‬./‫)ر‬, 49
Ummah, 2 , 20, 23 , 24, 25, 33, 34, 35, 37, 38 , 40, 41 , 44,
46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 58, 61, 62
‘ Uthmān ibn Abī a l-‘ Ās ( ), 49
wa sīlah, se e interme diation
walī, 6
wilāyah , see sp ir itual sov ere ignty
Z uhr ī, 60
Author’s Arabic and English Books

Arabic Books
1 a t-Ta ssa wa r-ul- Islāmī li- tab ī‘at- il-basha riy yah
2 Nahj-ut- ta rbiyyat-il-ijtimā‘iyyah fil- Qur’ān
3 a t-Ta ssa wa r-ut- ta sh rī‘ ī lil-hukm-il-I slāmī
4 Fa lsafa t-ul-ijtihād wal-‘ālim-ul-mu‘ sir
5 a l-Ja rīmah fil- fiqh- il-Islāmī
6 Minhā j-ul-khu tbāt lil-‘ īdayn wa l- jumu‘āt
7 Qa wā‘ id-u l-iq tisād fil- Islām
8 a l-Iqtisād-ul-arba wī wan-n izām-u l-misr fil- Islām

Englis h Books
9 ‘I rfān-ul-Qu r’ān (pa rt-1)
10 S īra t-u r-Ra sū l, vo l.1
11 The Ghadīr Dec la ration
12 B esee ching fo r Help (I stighāthah)
13 I slamic Conc ept of Inte rmed iation (T a wassul)
14 R eal Islamic Faith and the P rophet’s Sta tu re
15 Gree ting s and Sa luta tions on th e P rophe t ( A)
16 Sp iritua lism and Magne tism
17 I slamic Ph ilo soph y of Human Life
18 I slam in Va rious Pe rspe ctive s
19 I slam and Ch ristianity
20 I slam and Criminality
21 Qu r’ān ic Con cep t o f Human Gu idanc e
22 I slamic Conc ept of Human Na tu re
23 Div ine Plea sure
24 Qu r’ān ic Philo sophy o f B enevo len ce (Ih sān)
25 I slam and Freedom of Human Will
26 I slamic P enal Sy stem and its Ph ilo sophy
27 I slamic Conc ept of La w
28 Ph ilo sophy of Ijtihād and th e Mode rn Wo rld
29 Qu r’ān ic Ba sis o f Con stitu tiona l Theo ry
30 I slam — Th e S tate Re lig ion
31 Lega l Chara cte r of I slamic Punishmen ts
32 Lega l Stru ctu re o f I slamic Punishments
33 Cla ssifica tion o f I slamic Punishments
34 I slamic Ph ilo soph y of Punishmen ts
35 I slamic Conc ept of Crime
36 Qu r’ān on Creation and Expan sion of Unive rse
37 Crea tion and Evo lution o f th e Unive rse
38 Crea tion o f Man
39 I slam on preven tion of Hea rt Disea se s
The Author
D R. T A HI R -U L-Q AD RI is i n need of no introdu cti on to thos e
affi li at ed to t he many fi el ds, whi ch he has m as t ered du ri ng a
s m all peri od of t im e. He is the founding l eader of M i nhaj-ul -
Qu ran Int ernat ional (MQ I ), whi ch i s bas ed i n over 80 co untri es
o f t h e worl d. It s m ain aims are working for glo b al peace and
h um an rights, revivi ng Is l ami c values, t eachi ngs and tradit io ns
an d s t riving for t h e unit y of t he Umm ah t hro ug h a s o ci al,
ed u cati onal and polit i cal st ruggl e.
As Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri is pres ent ing the t rue peacefu l
m ess age of Is l am pure from i nnovations added int o i t and
i nt ern al and ext ernal politi cal i nfl uences, his wo rk, m es s age
an d call are accept ed wit h open arm s. The m ai n reasons b ei ng
t h at he has port rayed Is l am as a t ruly moderat e fai th i n i ts
o rigi n al form, free from any form of extremis m, fanati cis m and
t erro ri sm. As part of hi s vast s t ruggl e for equalit y, eq uit y and
eq u al hum an ri ghts for all, he has writt en over t wo hundred and
fi ft y books on all ki nds of m odern, rel igi ous, s pi rit ual and
s ecul ar is sues in Engl is h, Urdu and Arabi c.
Dr. T ahir-ul -Qadri i s accept ed as one o f t he hi ghest
au th o riti es in t he worl d on Isl am, Isl am and th e W est, Isl am
an d S ci ence and m any ot her s ubj ects, whi ch is why h e h as
d eliv ered th ous ands of l ectures i n i nt ernat ional con feren ces,
u ni v ersit i es and insti tut ions all over the world o n all t ypes of
i ss u es. Alt hough he i s a s chol ar and a reli gi ous l ead er fo r
wh om t here i s no m at ch, his educati onal, s oci al and p oli ti cal
effo rt s have als o penet rat ed s oci et y. He is l eading a p eaceful
m ov em ent i n P akis t an t o liberat e t he poor from the co rru pt
ru lin g eli te, whi ch has ruled t he count ry over t h e l as t h al f
cen tu ry. He is l ead ing t his revolt by get ti ng the po or and
d o wn trodden s egm en ts of s oci et y behind him. In doi ng s o h e
fo rm ed hi s own polit ical party i n 1989 by t he nam e o f
“ Pak ist an Awami T eh reek” (P akist an Popul ar M ov em ent ),
wh ich has b een carrying out t his s truggl e in t he politi cal and
el ect o ral arenas. Unli ke any other reli gi ous or poli ti cal
p erso nalit y, Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri and his mi ssi on h av e at tract ed
p eop l e from varyi ng s ects and religions. He an d h is
o rg an is ati on are th e sol e hope for i nt er-s ect and int erfai th
p eace, harmony and unit y. His i mm ens e achiev em ents in the
fi el d of education and wel fare have been i nt ernati on al ly
reco gni s ed by the m any int ernati onal awards he has received.
In a growi ng in t ernati onal atm os phere of ant i-Isl ami sm,
p ol iti cal con fli ct s bet ween W est ern and M usl im cou nt ri es and
t h e dis t ance bet ween t he W es t and Isl am s eem in g to b e
i n creasi ng, Dr. T ahi r-ul -Qadri is t he one m an who can bri dg e
t h e g ap bet ween t he W est and Isl am. Not onl y can h e sol v e th e
p rob l ems of t he Mu sli m worl d but i n doi ng s o he will al so
s ol v e the probl ems faced by W est ern nati ons. If you wish to
l earn m ore about hi m and hi s org ani s ati on or woul d l ik e to jo in
h is p eaceful movem ent t hen do not hesi t at e t o cont act us on th e
co nt act det ai ls g iven bel ow:

Dr. Tahir-ul-Qadri
B o rn : F eb. 19, 1951 in Jhang, P akis tan
PhD: F rom Punj ab Universit y, P aki st an in 1986.
MQ I: F ounded Mi nhaj -ul -Quran Int ernat io nal i n 1 981.
PAT: F ounded the poli ti cal party, P ak ist an Awam i
T ehreek (PA T ) in 1989.
B oo ks: Over 250 publ ished.
L ectu res : Over 5000 avai l abl e on Vi deo/ Au di o cas s ett es
and VC Ds.
Minhaj-ul-Q uran Inte rnational (MQ I) :
3 6 5-M, M odel Town, Lahore, P akist an
P ho n e: 0092-42-111-140-140 F ax: 0092-42-516818 4
h tt p:// www.mi nhaj. org htt p:// www.pat. com.pk
Em ail : t ehreek@minhaj. org
Dire cto rate of Fo reign Affairs MQ I:
T el: 0092-42-5171404, F ax: 0092-42-5169114,
Em ail : dfa@mi nhaj. org
Dr. Tahir-ul-Q adri:
Em ail : qadri@minhaj. org